Pioneer Super Tuner III D AVH-P6850DVD Operation Manual
Black plate (1,1) Operation Manual A V Receiver/6-Disc Changer with 7 inch Wide Display A VH-P6850D VD English <CRB2163-B>1
Black plate (2,1) Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please rea d through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished read ing the instr uctions, keep this ma n- ual in a safe place for future r eference. Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 8 ! DVD video disc region numbers 8 ! When an operation is prohibited 11 Precautions IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS 6 T o ensure safe driving 6 T o avoid batter y exhaustion 7 Before Y ou Start About this unit 8 About this manual 9 In case of trouble 9 F eatures 9 About WMA 10 T o protect the LCD screen 10 F or viewing LCD comfortably 11 What the marks on DVDs indicate 11 Resetting the microprocessor 11 About the demo mode 12 Use and care of the remote control 12 Customising your system Connecting with separately sold Pioneer products 13 Using multi-channel processor 13 Using iP od 13 Using the AVG- VDP1 (P ioneer Vehicle Dynamics Processor) 13 Using the rear display 13 Using Bluetooth wireless technology 14 What âÂÂs What Head unit 15 Remote control 16 Basic Operations T urning the unit on and selecting a source 19 Loading/Ejecting discs 20 Adjusting the flap angle 21 Adjusting the volume 21 T urning the unit off 21 T ouch panel key basic operation 22 T uner Listening to the radio 24 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 25 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 25 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 25 T uning in strong signals 26 Playing DVD video discs W atching a DVD video 27 Operating the DVD menu 28 Skipping back or forward to another title 28 Stopping playback 28 P ausing DVD video playback 28 Resume playback (Bookmark) 29 F rame-by-fram e playback 29 Slow motion playback 29 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specifie d time 30 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 30 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 31 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 31 Return to the specified scene 32 Automatic playback of DVDs 32 <CRB2163-B>2 Contents En 2
Black plate (3,1) Introduction of advanced DVD video operation 32 Repeating play 32 Selecting audio output 33 Playing Video CDs W atching a Video CD 34 Stopping playback 35 P ausing Video CD playback 35 F rame-by-fram e playback 35 Slow motion playback 35 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specifie d time 36 PBC playback 36 Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 37 Repeating play 37 Selecting audio output 37 Playing CDs Listening to a CD 38 Stopping playback 39 P ausing CD playback 39 Using CD TEXT functions 39 Introduction of advanced CD operation 40 Repeating play 40 Playing tracks in random order 40 Scanning tracks of a CD 40 Playing MP3/WMA Listening to MP3/WMA 41 Stopping playback 42 P ausing MP3/WMA playback 42 Displaying information on MP3/WMA file 43 Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (MP3/WMA) operation 44 Repeating play 44 Playing tracks in random order 44 Scanning folders and tracks 45 Multi-CD Player Listening to a CD 46 P ausing CD playback 47 Using CD TEXT functions 47 50-disc multi-CD player 47 Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 48 Repeating play 48 Playing tracks in random order 48 Scanning CDs and tracks 49 Using ITS playlists 49 Using compression and bass emphasis 50 TV tuner W atching the television 51 Storing and recalling broadcast stations 52 Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 52 Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 53 Selecting the area group 53 Playing songs on iPod Listening to songs on your iP od 54 Browsing for a song 54 P ausing a song 55 Displaying text information on iPod 55 Displaying information on song 55 Repeating play 55 Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) 56 Bluetooth Audio Listening to songs on BT Audio (Bluetooth audio player) 57 Connecting a Bluetoo th audio player 58 Playing songs on Bluetooth audio player 58 <CRB2163-B>3 En 3 Contents
Black plate (4,1) Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player 59 Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 59 Bluetooth T elephone Hands-free phoning with cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology 60 Setting up for hands-free phoning 61 Basic operation of hands-free phoning 61 Introduction of advanced hands-free phoning operation 62 Connecting a cellular phone 62 Disconnecting a cellular phone 63 Registering connected cellular phone 63 Deleting a registered phone 64 Connecting to a registe red cellular phone 64 Using the Phone Book 64 Using the Call Histor y 66 Using preset numbers 67 Making a call by entering phone number 68 Clearing memory 68 Setting the automat ic answering 68 Setting the automat ic rejecting 68 Switching the ring tone 68 Echo canceling and noise reduction 69 Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 69 Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 70 Using balance adjustment 70 Using the equalizer 71 Adjusting loudness 72 Using subwoofer output 72 Using nonfading output 72 Using the high pass filter 73 Adjusting source levels 73 Staging for car environment 73 Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustments 75 Using the position selector 75 Using balance adjustment 76 Adjusting source levels 76 Using the dynamic range control 77 Using the down-mix function 77 Using the direct control 77 Using the Dolby P ro Logic II 77 Setting the speaker setting 78 Adjusting the speaker output levels 79 Selecting a cross-over frequency 80 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 80 Using the time alignment 81 Using the equalizer 82 Using the auto-equalizer 84 Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) 84 Setup Introduction of setup adjustments 87 Setting the A V input 87 Setting the clock 88 Selecting video on rear display 89 DVD Setup Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 90 Setting the subtitle language 90 Setting the audio language 91 Setting the menu language 91 Switching the assist subtitle on or off 91 Setting the angle icon display 91 Setting the aspect ratio 92 Setting the parental lock 92 <CRB2163-B>4 Contents En 4
Black plate (5,1) Initial Setup Adjusting initial settings 94 Switching the auxiliary setting 94 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 94 Setting the FM tuning step 95 Setting the AM tuning step 95 Changing languages for CAUTION 95 Switching the sound muting/attenuation 95 Mixing AVG-VDP1 beep and audio sound 96 Correcting distorted sound 96 Setting the TV signal 96 Resetting the audio functions 97 Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection 97 Extending the vehicle â s antenna 97 Other F unctions Adjusting the screen 98 Selecting the background display 99 Adjusting the respons e positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) 100 Displaying the AVG-VDP1 (P ioneer Vehicle Dynamics Processor) 100 Using the AUX source 101 Setting remote control code type 102 Using the preprogrammed function 102 Additional Information T roubleshooting 103 Error messages 105 Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages 105 DVD player and care 107 DVD discs 107 CD-R/CD-RW discs 107 Dual Discs 108 MP3 and WMA files 108 About folders and MP3/WMA files 110 Using the display correctly 110 Language code chart for DVD 112 T erms 113 Specifications 116 Index 118 <CRB2163-B>5 En 5 Contents
Black plate (6,1) IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future refer- ence. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully be- fore operating your display . 2 Keep this manual handy as a re ference for operating procedures and safety informa- tion. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care- fully . 4 Do not allow other persons to use this sys- tem until they have read and understood the operating instructions. 5 Do not install the display where it may (i) obstruct the driver âÂÂs vision, (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle âÂÂs oper- ating systems or safety features, includ- ing air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver âÂÂs ability to safely oper- ate the vehicle. 6 Do not operate this display if doing so in any way will divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. Always observe safe driving rules and follow all existing traffic regulations. If you experi- ence difficulty in operating the system or reading the display , park your vehicle in a safe location and mak e necessary adjust- ments. 7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. 8 Never use headphones while driving. 9 T o promote safety , certain functions are disabled unless the parking brake is on, and the vehicle is not in motion. 10 Never set the volume of your display so high that you cannot hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. WARNING ! Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself. Installation or servi- cing of the display by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be danger ous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards. T o ensur e safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWITCH . IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. ! T o avoid the risk of damage and injur y and the potential violation of applicable laws, this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver . ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. Also, rear displays should not be in a location where it is a visible distraction to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed and this unit â s DVD features should not be used. <CRB2163-B>6 Precautions En 6 Section 01
Black plate (7,1) When you attempt to watch a DVD, Video CD or TV while driving, the warning VIDEO VIEW- ING IS NOT A V AILABLE WHILE DRIVING will appear on the front display . T o watch a DVD, Video CD or TV on the front display , park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. T o avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this unit. Using this unit without running the engine can result in battery drainage. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. <CRB2163-B>7 Precautions En 7 Section 01 Precautions
Black plate (8,1) About this unit CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, this unit damage, smoke, and overheat could result from contact with liquids. ! â CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCTâ This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain ac- cess to the inside of the product. Refer all ser- vicing to qualified personne l. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op- erating procedures and precautions. ! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! P rotect this unit from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! If this unit does not operate properly , contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Ser- vice Station. Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD video Video CD CD Notes ! is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Li- censing Corporation. ! This player can only play back discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc region numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit. The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. <CRB2163-B>8 Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
Black plate (9,1) About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit âÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. In case of trouble Should this product fail to operate properly , contact your dealer or nearest authorized P io- neer Ser vice Station. Features T ouch panel key operation It is possible to operate this unit by using touch panel key . DVD video playback It is possible to play back DVD video and DVD- R/RW (video mode). Remember that use of this system for com- mercial or public viewing purposes may con- stitute an infringement on the author âÂÂs rights protected by the Copyright Law . Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). CD playback Music CD/CD -R/RW playback is possible. MP3 file playback Y ou can play back MP3 files recorded on CD- ROM/CD-R/CD -RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). ! Supply of this product only conveys a li- cense for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broad- casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other net- works or in other electronic content distri- bution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An inde- pendent license for such use is required. F or details, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. WMA file playback Y ou can play back WMA files recorded on CD- ROM/CD-R/CD -RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). NTSC, P AL, P AL-M (for South America) and SECAM (for Russian) compatibility This unit is NTSC/P AL/P AL-M/SECAM system compatible. When connecting other compo- nents to this unit, be sure components are compatible with the same video system other - wise images will not be correctly reproduced. Multi-aspect Switching between wide screen, letterbox and panscan display is possible. Multi-audio Y ou can switch between multiple audio sys- tems recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-subtitle Y ou can switch between multiple subtitle lan- guages recorded on a DVD as desired. <CRB2163-B>9 Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Black plate (10,1) Multi-angle Y ou can switch between multiple viewing an- gles of a scene recorded on a DVD as desired. Hands-free phoning Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100), this unit realizes effortless hands-free phoning with Bluetooth wireless technology. Bluetooth audio player compatibility Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100), you can control Bluetooth audio player featur- ing Bluetooth wireless technology. iPod î compatibility When you use this unit with a P ioneer iP od adapter (CD -IB100 B) (sold separately), you can control an iP od with Dock Connector . ! iP od is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovisio n Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. About WMA The Windows Media ⢠logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Notes ! This unit may not operate correctly depending on the application used to encode WMA files. ! Depending on the version of Wi ndows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. T o protect the LCD screen ! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the display when this unit is not being used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures. ! When using a cellular phone, keep the an- tenna of the cellular phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. ! Never touch the screen with anything be- sides your finger when operating the touch panel function. The screen can scratch easily . <CRB2163-B>10 Before Y ou Start En 10 Section 02
Black plate (1 1,1) For viewing LCD comfortably Due to its construction, the viewing angle of the LCD screen is limited. Y ou can adjust it by changing either screen size or picture adjust- ment. Changing the wide screen size By changing the screen size from 4:3 to 16:9, you can adjust the screen so that the screen can fit to the video image you are playing. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the wide scr een mode on page 98. Changing the picture adjustm ent Y ou can make the best adjustment to the pic- ture display by changing BRIGHT , CONTRAST, COLOR and HUE . Y ou can also dim or enlight the overall picture image using DIMMER. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the picture adjustment on page 98. What the marks on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the number of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the number of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the number of viewing an- gles. Mark Meaning 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to -height ratio) type. 2 3 4 ALL Indicates the number of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be performed because of the programming on the disc. When this happens, the icon appears on the screen. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. Resetting the microprocessor P ressing RESET lets you reset the micropro - cessor to its initial settings. The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: ! P rior to using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly ! When strange or incorrect messages ap- pear on the display 1 T ur n the ignition switch OFF . 2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. RESET button <CRB2163-B>11 Before Y ou Start En 11 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Black plate (12,1) Notes ! When using with AVG-VDP1, if you press RESET , be sure ACC OFF is selected. If ACC ON is selected, correct operation may not be possible even if you press RESET. ! After completing connections or when you want to erase all memorized settings or return the unit to its initial (factor y) settings, switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET. About the demo mode Important The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be con- nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations. If this is not done, the vehicle batter y may be drained. The feature demo automatically starts when you select the source OFF . The demo con- tinues while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. T o cancel the feature demo, press and hold ENTERT AINMENT (ENT) . T o restart the feature demo, press and hold ENTERT AINMENT (ENT) again. Remember that if the feature demo continues operating when the car engine is turned off , it may drain batter y power . Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( âÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper di- rection. ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray . WARNING Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor . CAUTION ! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium batter y . ! Remove the batter y if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the batter y in fire. ! Do not handle the battery with metallic tools. ! Do not store the batter y with metallic materi- als. ! In the event of batter y leakage, wipe the re- mote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or en- vironmental public institutions â rules that apply in your countr y/area. Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. ! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. <CRB2163-B>12 Before Y ou Start En 12 Section 02
Black plate (13,1) Connecting with separately sold Pioneer products Connecting with other P ioneer products, you can cr eate the best audio -visual environment for enjoying music and movie in car . This sec- tion describes available options that can be con- trolled by this unit. Using multi-channel processor When using this unit with a P ioneer multi- channel processor , you can enjoy the atmo - sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5.1 channel re- cordings. F or details concerning operation, refer to Intr o- duction of DSP adjustments on page 75. ! Manufactured under license from Dolby La- boratories. âÂÂDolby âÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logic âÂÂ, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ! â DTSâ and â DTS Digital Surroundâ are regis- tered trademarks of Digital Theater Sys- tems, Inc. Using iPod When you use this unit with a P ioneer iP od adapter (CD -IB100 B) (sold separately), you can control an iP od with Dock Connector . F or details concerning operation, refer to Play- ing songs on iP od on page 54. ! iP od is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. ! iP od adapter supports only an iP od with Dock Connector . Using the A VG-VDP1 (Pioneer V ehicle Dynamics Processor) This unit can be used as the display unit for the AVG-VDP1 (sold separately) product. F or details concerning operation, refer to Dis- playing the AVG-VDP1 (P ioneer V ehicle Dy- namics P r ocessor) on page 100. Using the rear display Combining this unit with a rear display (sold separately), you can display the selected source on the rear display so passengers in rear seats can comfortably view the same image with the front or they can watch the dif- ferent image (i.e. image from AVG- VDP1) inde- pendently . F or details concerning operation, refer to Se- lecting video on r ear display on page 89. ! When a P ioneer V ehicle Dynamics P roces- sor (AVG-VDP1) is connected to this unit, the AVG-VDP1 can be displayed on the rear display . (Refer to page 89.) Important NEVER install the rear display in a location that enables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while driving. <CRB2163-B>13 Customising your system En 13 Section 03 Customising your system
Black plate (14,1) Using Bluetooth wireless technology Playing a Bluetooth audio player using with Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100) If you connect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD - BTB100) to this unit, you can control Blue- tooth audio player via Bluetooth wireless tech- nology . F or details concerning operation, refer to Blue- tooth Audio on page 57. ! Even though your audio player does not contain a Bluetooth wireless technology module, you can still control it using a Bluetooth adapter sold on the market. ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the market. Hands-free phoning using with Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100) If you use Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100), you can connect a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology to this unit for hands-free, wireless calls, even while driving. F or details concerning hands-free phoning op- eration, refer to Hands-free phoning with cellu- lar phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology on page 60. ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the market. <CRB2163-B>14 Customising your system En 14 Section 03
Black plate (15,1) Head unit 1 BAND/ESC button P ress to select among three FM bands and one AM band and to cancel the control mode of functions. 2 RESET button P ress to return to the factor y settings (initial settings). 3 Signal receptor Receives signals from a remote control. 4 c /d buttons P ress to do manual seek tuning, fast for- ward, reverse and track search controls. 5 VOLUME P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 6 SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. 7 ENTERT AINMENT (ENT) button P ress to display the entertainment menu. 8 WIDE button P ress to select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. 9 V .ADJ button P ress and hold to display the picture adjust- ment menu. a OPEN button P ress to slide down or up the LCD panel. <CRB2163-B>15 What â s Wha t En 15 Section 04 What â s What
Black plate (16,1) Remote control Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 1 Remote control selection switch Switch to change the setting of the remote control. For details, refer to Setting re mote con- trol code type on page 102. 2 SOURCE button P ress to cycle through all the available sources. Press and hold to turn the source off . 3A T T button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the ori- ginal volume level. 4 VOLUME but- tons P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 5 AUDIO button P ress to change the audio langua ge during DVD playback. SUB TITLE but- ton P ress to change the subtitle langua ge during DVD playback. ANGLE button P ress to change the viewing angle during DVD playback. 6 RETURN button P ress to display the PBC (playback control) menu during PBC playback . a 2 3 k l j f g h 4 d e c b 8 6 5 7 i 1 9 <CRB2163-B>16 What â s Wha t En 16 Section 04
Black plate (17,1) Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 7 a /b button ( DISC) P ress to select the next/previou s disc. 8 Remote control operation mode switch Switch the operation mode between AV H, DVD and TV modes. Normall y, set to AV H .F o r details, refer to Using the re mote control operation mode switch on the next page. 9 BOOKMARK button/ PGM button P ress to operate the preprogram med functions for each source. (Refer to Using the pr epro- grammed function on page 102.) P ress to turn the bookmark functio n on or off . F or details, refer to Resume play- back (Bookmark) on page 29. 10 DIRECT button Not used. 11 REAR .S button Not used. 12 DISPLA Y but- ton P ress to select different displays. Not used. 13 ENTERT AIN- MENT (ENT) button P ress to display the entertainm ent menu. Not used. 14 1 âÂÂ12 buttons, CLEAR button P ress 0 âÂÂ9 to input numbers. Buttons 1 âÂÂ6 can op- erate the preset tuning for the tuner or disc changing for DVD player or multi- CD player . P ress CLEAR to clear the input numbe rs. P ress to select a menu on the DVD top menu. 15 BACK button P ress to return to the previous display . Not used. 16 BAND/ESC but- ton P ress to select among three FM bands and one AM band and to cancel the cont rol mode of functions. P ress to switch mode between MP3/WMA and audio data (CD-DA ) when playing discs with MP3/WMA and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD - EXTRA and MIXED-MOD E CDs. P ress to switch mode between MP3/ WMA and audio data (CD -DA) when playing discs with MP3/WMA and audio data (CD-DA ) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs. 17 PLA Y/P AUSE ( f) button P ress to switch sequentially betwee n playback and pause. REVERSE ( m) button P ress to per form fast reverse. FORW ARD ( n) button P ress to per form fast for ward. PREVIOUS ( o) button P ress to return to the previous track (chapter). NEXT ( p) button P ress to go to the next track (chapter). STEP ( r/ q) button P ress to move ahead one frame at a time during DVD/VideoCD playback. Press and hold for one second to activate slow playback. STOP ( g) but- ton P ress to stop playback. <CRB2163-B>17 What â s Wha t En 17 Section 04 What â s What
Black plate (18,1) Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 18 AUTO PLA Y button P ress to turn the DVD auto -playback function on or off. 19 a /b button ( FOLDER) P ress to select the next/previou s folder . 20 Joystick Move to do fast forward, reverse and track search controls. Click to recall MENU. Move to select a menu on the DVD menu. 21 MENU button P ress to display the DVD menu during DVD playback. TOP MENU (TOP .M) button P ress to return to the top menu durin g DVD playback. Using the remote control operation mode switch There are three remote control operation modes on the remote control. AV H mode operation When operating this unit by remote control, the mode is normally switched to AVH . ! The joystick on the remote control can per- form the same operations as the one on the head unit. Furthermore, the joystick can per form the same operations as the touch panel keys a, b, c and d. ! 1 âÂÂ6 can perform the same operations as the preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 and the disc selection keys 01 âÂÂ06 . â If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12 by using buttons 1 âÂÂ6 , press and hold the corresponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number ap- pears in the display. DVD mode operation If you switch the mode to DVD , the joystick and 1 âÂÂ12 operations are changed for DVD player . % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions, switch the mode to DVD: ! When operating the DVD menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 28.) ! When operating the PBC menu by using 1 âÂÂ12 . (Refer to Watching a V ideo CD on page 34.) ! When specifying title by using 1 âÂÂ12 . (Refer to Specifying title on page 30.) TV mode operation TV operations available with a Pioneer TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P5750TV(P)) can be controled with AV H mode. TV mode is not used with this unit. ! F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manuals. <CRB2163-B>18 What â s Wha t En 18 Section 04
Black plate (19,1) T urning the unit on and selecting a source 1 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. Y ou can select a source you want to listen to. T o switch to the DVD player , load a disc in the unit to switch to DVD-V . % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. The source names are displayed and select- able ones are highlighted. ! DISC 1 â Built-in DVD player disc 1 ! DISC 2 â Built-in DVD player disc 2 ! DISC 3 â Built-in DVD player disc 3 ! DISC 4 â Built-in DVD player disc 4 ! DISC 5 â Built-in DVD player disc 5 ! DISC 6 â Built-in DVD player disc 6 ! TUNER â T uner ! TV â T elevision ! iPod â iP od ! AUX1 â AUX 1 ! AUX2 â AUX 2 ! AV 1 â AV 1 input ! AV 2 â AV 2 input ! TEL â BT telephone ! BT Audio â Bluetooth audio player ! EXT1 â External unit 1 ! EXT2 â External unit 2 ! M-CD â Multi-CD player ! OFF â T urn the unit off ! ESC â Close source select menu # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . % When using the buttons, press SOURCE to select a source. P ress SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER (tuner) âÂÂTV (television) â AV 1 (AV 1) â AV 2 (AV 2)â DVD-V (built-in DVD player) â M-CD (multi- CD player) âÂÂiPod (iPod) â EXT1 (external unit 1) â EXT2 (external unit 2) â AUX1 (AUX 1) âÂÂAUX2 (AUX 2) âÂÂTEL (blue- tooth telephone) â BT Audio (bluetooth audio player) Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: â When there is no unit corresponding to the selected source connected to this unit. â When there is no disc in the unit. â When there is no magazine in the multi- CD player . â When the AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 94). â When the AV (AV input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 87). ! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enable s control of basic functions by this unit. T wo external units can be controlled by this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit. ! When this unit â s blue/white lead is connect ed to the vehicle âÂÂs auto-antenna relay control terminal, the vehicle âÂÂs antenna extends when this unit âÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the antenna, turn the source off . <CRB2163-B>19 Basic Operation s En 19 Section 05 Basic Operations
Black plate (20,1) Loading/Ejecting discs CAUTION Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel. Be especially cautious of children âÂÂs hands and fin- gers. Loading a disc Up to six discs can be stored into this unit. Each disc is stored in each disc holder allow- ing you to specif y a holder for loading a disc. 1 Press OPEN on the unit to display load- ing/ejecting menu. The LCD panel opens halfway , and the load- ing/ejecting menu is displayed on the screen. ! If the disc in the holder has already been played, the disc type is displayed on the holder icon (e.g. CD, DVD etc.). ! NO DISC is displayed for an empty holder . 2 T ouch LOAD next to the holder you want to insert a disc in. The selected holder flashes. When READY is displayed, this unit becomes on standby to load a disc into the holder . # If the holder has already loaded a disc, you need to eject the disc first. F or details concerning about ejecting a disc, refer to Ejecting a disc on the next page. 3 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. The disc is loaded into the selected holder . Repeat these steps until you have done load- ing discs into this unit. # T o cancel loading the disc into the selected holder , touch CANCEL. 4 T o replace the LCD panel to the original position, pre ss OPEN on the unit. # When the automatic playback function is on , this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automati- cally start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 32. Notes ! The DVD player plays one, standard 12-cm disc at a time. Playing back an 8-cm disc is not possible with this unit. Playable disc and adapter are listed in the table below . 12-cm disc 8-cm disc 8-cm disc adapter àâÂÂâ ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 8. ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play , check that the label side of the disc is up. P ress OPEN and touch h to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before insert- ing it again. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to Error messages on page 105. ! If bookmark function is on , DVD playback re- sumes from the selected point. For more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 29. ! This unit does not automatically change discs even if it reaches to the end of the currently playing disc. T o change discs, press a or b button (DISC) on the remote control. <CRB2163-B>20 Basic Operation s En 20 Section 05
Black plate (21,1) Ejecting a disc Y ou can specify a holder that you eject a disc from. 1 Press OPEN on the unit to display load- ing/ejecting menu. The LCD panel opens halfway , and the load- ing/ejecting menu is displayed on the screen. ! If the disc in the holder has already been played, the disc type is displayed on the holder icon (e.g. CD, DVD etc.). ! NO DISC is displayed for an empty holder . 2 T ouch h next to the holder you want to eject the disc from. The disc is ejected. # Y ou can eject all loaded discs at once. T o do this, touch ALL h. T o cancel the all ejecting, touch CANCEL. 3 T o replace the LCD panel to the original position, pre ss OPEN on the unit. Adjusting the flap angle Y ou can adjust the flap angle as needed. Important When adjusting the flap angle, be sure to follow the procedures explained below . Forcibly adjust- ing the flap angle by hand may damage it. 1 Press and hold OPEN button on the unit to display the flap angle adjust menu. 2 T ouch or - to adjust the flap angle. Each time you touch , the flap comes out to- ward you. T ouching - moves the flap the other way around. ! Y ou can select from five positions for the flap angle. ! The adjusted flap angle will be memorized. The next time you eject or load discs, the flap returns to the position where you set the angle. Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. P ress VOLUME to increase or decrease the source volume. With the remote control, press VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. T urning the unit off % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch OFF. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # When using the buttons, press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off . # T o completely turn the display off , touch and hold DISP . OFF . Refer to Using the common touch panel keys on the next page. <CRB2163-B>21 Basic Operation s En 21 Section 05 Basic Operations
Black plate (22,1) T ouch panel key basic operation Activating the touch panel keys 4 2 3 1 1 Common touch panel keys F or details, refer to Using the common touch panel keys on this page. 2 Information bar 3 T ouch panel keys T ouch to do various operations. 4 Clock display T o turn the clock on or off , or to adjust the time, refer to Setting the clock on page 88. 1 T ouch the screen to activate the touch panel keys corresponding to each source. The touch panel keys appear on the display . # T o go to the next group of touch panel keys, touch d . 2 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Using the common touch panel keys EQ , AUDIO MENU and DISP . OFF keys are commonly displayed in the source menu. EQ key T ouch EQ to display the equalizer cur ve setting menu. Adjust the equalizer curve and make the best sound characteristic for the sound type. F or details concerning operation, refer to Using the equalizer on page 71. AUDIO MENU key T ouch AUDIO MENU to display the menu for various settings. F or details concerning operation, refer to Oper- ating the menu on the next page. DISP . OFF key T ouch and hold DISP . OFF to turn the display off . T ouch the screen to turn the display on. Using DISP . OFF to retract the vehicle â s antenna At the standard setting, the vehicle âÂÂs auto an- tenna is automatically retracted when you se- lect the source OFF. However , when a navigation unit or AVG- VDP1 is connected to this unit, your vehicle âÂÂs antenna may be kept up-position even if the source OFF is selected. In that case, use DISP . OFF key and have the antenna retracted manually . ! Only when A VG-VDP1 is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. % T ouch the source OFF, and then, touch and hold DISP . OFF. The display is turned off and your vehicle âÂÂs an- tenna is retracted. ! When AVG-VDP1 and the multi-channel processor (e.g. DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) are connected to this unit, the antenna should be retracted at the time when the source OFF is selected. ! While the antenna is retracted, a beep from AVG- VDP1 is not properly mixed with the audio sound outputte d from this unit. <CRB2163-B>22 Basic Operation s En 22 Section 05
Black plate (23,1) Operating the menu 1 4 5 2 3 1 FUNCTION key T ouch to select functions for each source. 2 AUDIO key T ouch to select various sound quality con- trols. 3 SETUP key T ouch to select various setup functions. 4 BACK key T ouch to return to the previous display. 5 ESC key T ouch to cancel the control mode of func- tions. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch the desired key to display the function names you want to operate. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 3 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. <CRB2163-B>23 Basic Operation s En 23 Section 05 Basic Operations
Black plate (24,1) Listening to the radio 1 2 6 5 7 4 3 8 These are the basic steps necessar y to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to, AM or FM. 4 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 5 STEREO indicator Shows when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. 6 LOCAL indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 7 Frequency indicator Shows the frequency to which the tuner is tuned. 8 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TUNER to select the tuner . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, FM1 , FM2, FM3 for FM or AM. 4 T o select a preset channel, touch a pre- set channel on the list or touch a or b (P .CH). The preset channel you selected is tuned in. # T ouching LIST switches between the preset channel list display and the a/ b ( P .CH ) display . Either way, the channels that can be selected are the same. 5 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. The frequencies move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by mov- ing the joystick on the remote control left or right. 6 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip sta- tions. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the key . # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . <CRB2163-B>24 T uner En 24 Section 06
Black plate (25,1) Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 you can easily store up to six broad- cast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a key . % When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory keep touching one of preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have touched will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memor y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the radio station frequency is recalled from memor y. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. # When P1 âÂÂP6 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching LIST . Notes ! Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six AM stations can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 by moving the joystick on the remote control up or down. Introduction of advanced tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the frequenc y display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the frequency display . Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a key . <CRB2163-B>25 T uner En 25 Section 06 T uner
Black plate (26,1) % T ouch BSM on the function menu to turn BSM on. BSM appears. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM dis- appears. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSM again. Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may re- place broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 âÂÂP6 . T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 T ouch LOCAL on the function menu. 2 T ouch c on the LOCAL setting to turn local seek tuning on. # T o turn local seek tuning off , touch d. 3 T ouch c or d on the LEVEL setting to set the sensitivity . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM: FM: 1 âÂÂ2 âÂÂ3 âÂÂ4 The 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. <CRB2163-B>26 T uner En 26 Section 06
Black plate (27,1) W atching a DVD video 5 4 2 3 8 b a 6 7 9 1 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DVD video with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DVD video operation is explained start- ing on page 32. ! Switch the remote control operation mode to DVD to per form DVD operations. (Refer to page 18.) 1 DVD Video indicator Shows when a DVD video is playing. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 Audio language indicator Shows which audio language has been se- lected. 5 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. 6 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter . 8 Viewing angle indicator Shows which viewing angle has been se- lected. 9 Subtitle language indicator Shows which subtitle language has been selected. a Audio output indicator Shows the output channel selected cur- rently . b Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch a desired DVD holder number (e.g. DISC 1) to select the DVD player . Selectable DVD holders are highlighted. If a disc is not inserted, you cannot select that DVD holder . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # With some discs, a menu may be displayed. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next page.) # This unit does not automatically change discs even if it reaches to the end of the currently play- ing disc. T o change discs, press a or b button (DISC) on the remote control. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch d to switch the menu. T ouching d repeatedly changes the menus. 4 T o skip back or forward to another chapter , touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next chapter . T ouching o once skips to the start of the current chapter . T ouching it again will skip to the previous chapter . <CRB2163-B>27 Playing DVD video discs En 27 Section 07 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (28,1) # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another chapter by pressing o or p button on the re- mote control. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you release o or p. T o resume playback at a desired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding m or n button on the remote control. # F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Operating the DVD menu Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc contents using a menu. ! Y ou can display the menu by touching MENU or TOP MENU while a disc is play- ing. T ouching either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location se- lected from the menu. F or details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. 1 T ouch î î î to display touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. 2 T ouch a, b, c or d to select the desired menu item. 3 T ouch ENTER. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. Operating the DVD menu with 10 key Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc contents using 10KEY . 1 T ouch 10KEY. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 corresponding to a menu number and then touch ENTER to start playback. ! T o select 3, touch 3. ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in that order . Skipping back or forward to another title % T ouch a or b title key to skip back or forward to another title. T ouching a skips to the start of the next title. T ouching b skips to the start of the previous title. Title numbers are displayed for eight seconds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another title by moving the joystick up or down. Stopping playback % T ouch g. # When you stop DVD playback by touching g, that location on the disc is memorized, enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. <CRB2163-B>28 Playing DVD video discs En 28 Section 07
Black plate (29,1) % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE is displayed on the information bar and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Resume playback (Bookmark) The Bookmark function lets you resume play- back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. % During playback, touch BOOKMARK at the point you want to resume playback next time. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. Y ou can bookmark up to six discs. After that, the oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. # T o clear the bookmark on a disc, keep touch- ing BOOKMARK during playback. # Y ou can also bookmark a disc using BOOKMARK button on the remote control. Note One bookmark point can be stored for each disc holder independently . Frame-by-frame playba ck This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % T ouch r during playback. Each time you touch r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Keep touching r during playback. A beep sounds and forward slow motion play- back begins. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . 2 T ouch q or r to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you touch q or r it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 âÂÂ1/8 âÂÂ1/4 âÂÂ1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. <CRB2163-B>29 Playing DVD video discs En 29 Section 07 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (30,1) Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a title or chapter , and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. ! Chapter search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH. 2 T ouch TITLE (title), CHAP . (chapter) or TIME (time). 3 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . For titles and chapters ! T o select 3, touch 3. ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in that order . For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2, 1, 4 and 3 in that order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7 , 1, 0 and 0 in that order . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 4 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected scene. Notes ! With discs featuring a menu, you can also touch MENU or TOP MENU and then make selections from the displayed menu. ! With some discs, the icon may be dis- played, indicating that titles, chapters and time cannot be specified. Specifying title Y ou can use the direct search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a title. 1 T ouch 10KEY. # This feature is available only when the play- back is stopped. If you are playing back a disc, touch g to stop the playback and then touch 10KEY . 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 corresponding to a desired title number . ! T o select 3, touch 3. ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in that order . 3 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch . Title number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected title. Note T o per form this function with the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to DVD . (Refer to Using the r emote control operation mode switch on page 18.) Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. % T ouch AUDIO during playback. Each time you touch AUDIO it switches be- tween audio systems. <CRB2163-B>30 Playing DVD video discs En 30 Section 07
Black plate (31,1) Notes ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using AUDIO on the remote control. ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD âÂÂs package indicates the number of recorded languages/audio systems. ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using DVD SETUP . For details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 91. ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If this unit âÂÂs optical digital outputs are not con- nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. ! T ouching AUDIO during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. % T ouch SUB TITLE during playback. Each time you touch SUB TITLE it switches be- tween subtitle languages. Notes ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using SUB TITLE on the remote con- trol. ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD âÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded subtitle languages. ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using DVD SETUP. For details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 90. ! T ouching SUB TITLE during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback re- turns you to normal playback. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is dis- played. T urn angle icon display on or off using DVD SETUP . For details, refer to Set- ting the angle icon display on page 91. % T ouch ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. Each time you touch ANGLE it switches be- tween angles. Notes ! Y ou can also change the angle using ANGLE on the remote control. ! The 3 mark on a DVD â s package indicates it features multi-angle scenes. The number in the 3 mark indicates the number of angles from which scenes were shot. ! T ouching ANGLE during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. <CRB2163-B>31 Playing DVD video discs En 31 Section 07 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (32,1) Return to the specified scene Y ou can return to the specified scene where the DVD you are currently playing has been preprogrammed to return. % T ouch RETURN to return to the speci- fied scene. Note If a specified scene has not been preprogrammed in DVD disc, this function is not possible. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted, this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati- cally and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. % T ouch AUTO PLA Y to turn automatic playback on. # T o turn automatic playback off , touch AUTO PLA Y again. # Y ou can also turn automatic playback on or off by pressing AUTO PLA Y button on the remote control. # When the automatic playback is on, you can- not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on this page). Introduction of advanced DVD video operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the DVD playback : DISC (disc repeat), CHAPTER (chap- ter repeat), and TITLE (title repeat). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! DISC â Play through the current disc ! CHAPTER â Repeat just the current chapter <CRB2163-B>32 Playing DVD video discs En 32 Section 07
Black plate (33,1) ! TITLE â R epeat just the current title Notes ! If you per form chapter search or fast for ward/ reverse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the function may not be se- lectable, indicating that operating this function is not possible. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch the audio output. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the function may not be selectable, indicating that operating this function is not pos- sible. <CRB2163-B>33 Playing DVD video discs En 33 Section 07 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (34,1) W atching a Video CD 2 1 3 6 7 4 5 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a Video CD with your DVD player . More ad- vanced Video CD operation is explained start- ing on page 37. ! Switch the remote control operation mode to DVD to per form video CD operations. (Refer to page 18.) 1 Video CD indicator Shows when a Video CD is playing. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 6 Audio output indicator Shows the output channel selected cur- rently . 7 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch a desired DVD holder number (e.g. DISC 1) to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function, a menu is displayed. # This unit does not automatically change discs even if it reaches to the end of the currently play- ing disc. T o change discs, press a or b button (DISC) on the remote control. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch 10KEY and then touch 0 âÂÂ9 to se- lect the desired menu item. # Depending on the discs, the menu may be two or more pages long. In such case, touch o or p to display the next or previous menu. Once you confirm a desired menu number , touch 10KEY to make the selection. 4 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch . Playback starts from the selected menu item. # Y ou can display the menu by pressing RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. 5 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing o or p button on the re- mote control. # During PBC playback, a menu may be dis- played if you per form these operations. <CRB2163-B>34 Playing Video CDs En 34 Section 08
Black plate (35,1) 6 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you release o or p. T o resume playback at a desired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding m or n button on the remote control. # F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Stopping playback % T ouch g. # When you stop Video CD playback (during PBC playback only) by touching g, that location on the disc is memorized, enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Pausing Video CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE is displayed on the information bar and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Frame-by-frame playba ck This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % T ouch r during playback. Each time you touch r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Keep touching r during playback. A beep sounds and forward slow motion play- back begins. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . 2 T ouch q or r to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you touch q or r it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 âÂÂ1/8 âÂÂ1/4 âÂÂ1/2 <CRB2163-B>35 Playing Video CDs En 35 Section 08 Playing Video CDs
Black plate (36,1) Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a track, and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. ! Time search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH. 2 T ouch TRACK (track) or TIME (time). 3 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . For tracks ! T o select 3, touch 3. ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in that order . For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2, 1, 4 and 3 in that order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7 , 1, 0 and 0 in that order . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 4 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected scene. PBC playback During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON is displayed. Y ou can operate PBC menu with 10KEY. 1 When PBC menu is displayed, touch 10KEY. # Y ou can display the menu by touching RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. # Depending on the discs, the menu may be two or more pages long. In such case, touch o or p to display the next or previous menu. Once you confirm a desired menu number , touch 10KEY to make the selection. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 corresponding to a menu number and then touch to start play- back. ! T o select 3, touch 3. ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in that order . Notes ! PBC playback of Video-CD cannot be can- celled. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON, search and time search functions cannot be used nor can you select the range for repeat play . <CRB2163-B>36 Playing Video CDs En 36 Section 08
Black plate (37,1) Introduction of advanced Video CD operati on 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the V ideo CD playback: TRACK (track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track ! DISC â Repeat the current disc Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . Selecting audio output Y ou can switch the audio output. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right Notes ! Y ou can also switch the audio output using AUDIO on the remote control. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the function may not be se- lectable, indicating that operating this function is not possible. <CRB2163-B>37 Playing Video CDs En 37 Section 08 Playing Video CDs
Black plate (38,1) Listening to a CD 2 1 4 3 5 6 7 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your DVD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on page 40. 1 CD/CD-TEXT indicator Shows when a CD is playing. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc. 5 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 7 Repeat indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch a desired DVD holder number (e.g. DISC 1) to select the DVD player . Selectable DVD holders are highlighted. If a disc is not inserted, you cannot select that DVD holder . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # This unit does not automatically change discs even if it reaches to the end of the currently play- ing disc. T o change discs, press a or b button (DISC) on the remote control. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch LIST to display track titles and touch a desired title that you want to play back. The selected track will begin to play . 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # If tracks are many , you can change to the pre- vious or next page of the track list by touching or . # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d button on the unit or moving the joystick on the remote control left or right. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d button on the unit or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. <CRB2163-B>38 Playing CDs En 38 Section 09
Black plate (39,1) Notes ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD-DA by touching MEDIA or pressing BAND/ESC . This function can be operated only when the disc is playing. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto- matically . Stopping playback % T ouch g. # When you stop CD playback by touching g, that location on the disc is memorized, enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE appears in the display . Play of the cur- rent track pauses. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Using CD TEXT func tions Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist âÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Disc Title (disc title) âÂÂDisc Artist (disc artist name) â T rack Title (track title) âÂÂT rack Artist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO T .ARTIST NAME ). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 20 letters only of Disc Title , Disc Artist , T rack Title and T rack Artist . When the recorded information is longer than 20 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the title be- gins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the dis- play . <CRB2163-B>39 Playing CDs En 39 Section 09 Playing CDs
Black plate (40,1) Introduction of advanced CD operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. Repeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track ! DISC â Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA), repeat play performs within the currently playing data type even if DISC is selected. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order . % T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 2 When you find the desir ed track touch SCAN again. Note After scanning of a CD is finished, normal play- back of the tracks will begin again. <CRB2163-B>40 Playing CDs En 40 Section 09
Black plate (41,1) Listening to MP3/WMA 2 1 4 5 6 7 3 7 These are the basic steps necessar y to play an MP3/WMA with your built-in DVD player . More advanced MP3/WMA operation is explained starting on page 44. 1 Media indicator MP3 , WMA or MIX appears depending on the file format you are playing. When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD -EXTRA and MIXED -MODE CDs, MIX is displayed. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 Folder name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing folder . 5 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 6 T rack number indicator Shows the track (file) number currently play- ing. 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track (file). 8 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch a desired DVD holder number (e.g. DISC 1) to select the DVD player . Selectable DVD holders are highlighted. If a disc is not inserted, you cannot select that DVD holder . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch LIST to display track titles and touch a desired title that you want to play back. The selected track will begin to play . 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d button on the unit or moving the joystick on the remote control left or right. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d button on the unit or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. # There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. <CRB2163-B>41 Playing MP3/WMA En 41 Section 10 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (42,1) 6 T o select a folder , touch to show the folder one level higher and touch a folder name on the list. # Y ou can also select the next or previous folder by pressing a or b button (FOLDER) on the re- mote control. # T o return to folder 001 (ROOT), press and hold BAND/ESC . However , if folder 001 (ROOT) con- tains no files, playback commences with folder 002 . # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have an MP3/WMA file recorded in it. Notes ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD-DA by touching MEDIA or pressing BAND/ESC . This function can be operated only when the disc is playing. ! If you have switched between playback of MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA), play- back starts at the first track on the disc. ! This DVD player can play back an MP3/WMA file recorded on CD-ROM. (Refer to page 108 for files that can be played back.) ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued. When being read, FORMA T READ is dis- played. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 001 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 002.) ! This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. ! If the inserted disc contains no files that can be played back, NON-PLA Y ABLE DISC is dis- played. ! When playing an MP3/WMA disc containing more than 192 tracks, READY appears on the information bar for the track titles of 193rd and later . ! If the inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by digital rights management (DRM) , TRACK SKIPPED is displayed while the protected file is skipped. ! If all the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM, PROTECT is displayed. ! Once PROTECT is displayed for playing discs secured by DRM, switching from audio data (CD-DA) to WMA files may become a trigger to lock the list touch panel keys. In such case, touch LIST to turn the list display off and then touch LIST again to turn it on. The list touch panel keys should be reactivated. ! When a disc contains both WMA files which are protected by DRM and audio data (CD- DA), both types cannot be switched. In this case, only audio data will be played back. ! There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto- matically . Stopping playback % T ouch g. # When you stop MP3/WMA playback by touch- ing g, that location on the disc is memorized, en- abling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Pausing MP3/WMA playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. <CRB2163-B>42 Playing MP3/WMA En 42 Section 10
Black plate (43,1) % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE appears in the display . Play of the cur- rent track pauses. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Displaying information on MP3/WMA file Information recorded on an MP3/WMA disc can be displayed. 1 T ouch FILE INFO to display information on the MP3/WMA file you are currently playing. ! ALBUM (album title) ! TRACK (track title) ! FOLDER (folder name) ! FILE (file name) ! ARTIST (artist name) ! GENRE (genre) ! YEAR (year) # When playing back WMA files, lists of album title, genre and year appear in blank. # If specific information has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA file, the list appears in blank. # Depending on the version of ID3 tag or Win- dows Media Player , the information may not be displayed correctly. 2 T o return to the normal display , touch ESC. Displaying text information on MP3/WMA disc T ext information recorded on an MP3/WMA disc can be displayed on the information bar . % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Folder Name (folder name) âÂÂFile Name (file name) â T rack Title (track title) âÂÂArtist Name (artist name) â Album Title (album title) â Comment (comment) â BitRate (bit rate) # When playing back WMA files, album title and comment are not displayed. # When a list of folders/files is displayed by the touch of LIST , Current (currently playing folder) is displayed instead of Folder Name . # When playing back MP3 files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the bit rate value is not dis- played even af ter switching to bit rate. ( VBR will be displayed.) # If specific information has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA disc, NO XXXX will be dis- played (e.g., NO ARTIST NAME). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 20 letters only of Folder Name , File Name , T rack Title , Artist Name , Album Title and Comment on the information bar . When the recorded infor- mation is longer than 20 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the text in- formation can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the text infor - mation begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the text informatio n will appear in the display. <CRB2163-B>43 Playing MP3/WMA En 43 Section 10 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (44,1) Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (MP3/ WMA) operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. Repeating play F or MP3/WMA playback, there are three re- peat play ranges: FOLDER (folder repeat), TRACK (one-track repeat) and DISC (repeat all tracks). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! DISC â Repeat all tracks ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER. ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA), repeat play performs within the currently playing data type even if DISC is selected. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, FOLDER and DISC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected FOLDER or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. <CRB2163-B>44 Playing MP3/WMA En 44 Section 10
Black plate (45,1) Scanning folders and tracks While you are using FOLDER , the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using DISC , the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. 3 When you find the desir ed track (or folder) touch SCAN again. Note After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. <CRB2163-B>45 Playing MP3/WMA En 45 Section 10 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (46,1) Listening to a CD 1 5 6 4 3 2 8 7 Y ou can use this unit to contr ol a multi-CD player , which is sold separately . These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your multi- CD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on page 48. 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc. 5 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 7 Disc list display Shows the disc title list. 8 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch M-CD to select the multi-CD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch LIST to display disc titles and touch a desired disc that you want to play back. Operable disc titles are highlighted. If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12, touch or to display 07 âÂÂ12 . # If the connected multi-CD player is not com- patible with the disc title list function, LIST is not displayed. 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d button on the unit or moving the joystick on the remote control left or right. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching c or d. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d button on the unit or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. Notes ! When the multi-CD player per forms the pre- paratory operations, READY is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to the multi-CD player owner âÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. <CRB2163-B>46 Multi-CD Player En 46 Section 11
Black plate (47,1) ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto- matically . Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE appears in the display . Play of the cur- rent track pauses. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Using CD TEXT func tions Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi- CD player . Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist âÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs T ext information recorded on a CD TEXT disc can be displayed on the information bar . % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Disc Title (disc title) âÂÂDisc Artist (disc artist name) â T rack Title (track title) âÂÂT rack Artist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO T .ARTIST NAME ). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 20 letters only of Disc Title , Disc Artist , T rack Title and T rack Artist on the information bar . When the recorded information is longer than 20 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the title be- gins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the display . Selecting tracks from the track title list T rack title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them to play back. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU and FUNCTION and then touch TRACK LIST. 2 T ouch or to switch between the lists of titles. 3 T ouch your favorite track title. That selection will begin to play . 50-disc multi-CD player Only those functions described in this manual are supported by 50-disc multi-CD players. <CRB2163-B>47 Multi-CD Player En 47 Section 11 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (48,1) Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-CD player: M-CD (multi-CD player re- peat), TRACK (one-track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! M-CD â R epeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track ! DISC â Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to M-CD . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in ran- dom order within the repeat range, M-CD and DISC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected M-CD or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. <CRB2163-B>48 Multi-CD Player En 48 Section 11
Black plate (49,1) Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using DISC , the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using M-CD , the beginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. 3 When you find the desir ed track (or disc) touch SCAN again. Note After track or disc scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selec- tions. Creating a playlist with ITS programming Y ou can use ITS to enter and play back up to 99 tracks per disc from up to 100 discs. (With multi-CD players sold before the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. T ouch a or b to select the CD. 2 T ouch ITS MEMOR Y on the function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired track. 4 T ouch MEMORY to store the currently playing track in the playlist. MEMOR Y is displayed and the currently play- ing selection is added to your playlist. The dis- play then shows track number again. Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in mem- or y , data for a new disc will over write the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi-CD player will begin to play . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch ITS PLA Y on the function menu to tur n ITS play on. Playback begins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected M-CD or DISC ranges. # If no tracks in the current range are pro- grammed for ITS play , then ITS EMPTY is dis- played. # T o turn ITS play off , touch ITS PLA Y again. <CRB2163-B>49 Multi-CD Player En 49 Section 11 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (50,1) Erasing a track from your ITS playlist Y ou can delete a track from your ITS playlist if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. 1 Play the CD with the track you want to delete from your ITS playlist, and tur n ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on the previous page. 2 T ouch ITS MEMOR Y on the function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired track. 4 T ouch CLEAR to erase the track from your ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, ITS EMPTY is displayed and nor- mal play resumes. Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist Y ou can delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist if ITS play is off . 1 Play the CD that you want to delete. T ouch a or b to select the CD. 2 T ouch ITS MEMOR Y on the function menu. 3 T ouch CLEAR to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD from your ITS playlist. ITS CLEAR is displayed and all tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist. Using compression and bass emphasis Y ou can use these functions only with a multi- CD player that supports them. Using COMP (compression) and DBE (dy- namic bass emphasis) functions lets you ad- just the sound playback quality of the multi- CD player . Each of the functions has a two - step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at high- er volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. % T ouch COMPRESSION on the function menu to select your favorite setting. T ouch COMPRESSI ON repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 â COMP OFF âÂÂDBE 1 âÂÂDBE 2 # If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE, COMPRESSION cannot be selected. <CRB2163-B>50 Multi-CD Player En 50 Section 11
Black plate (51,1) W atching the television 1 3 4 5 2 6 Y ou can use this unit to contr ol a TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P5750TV(P)), which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. This section pro- vides information on TV operations with this unit which differs from that described in the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. Important Depending on the TV tuner connected to this unit, some functions may not be operable. F or de- tails, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to. 4 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 5 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned. 6 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, TV1 or TV2 . 4 T o select a preset channel, touch LIST to display preset channels and touch a desired preset channel. The preset channel you selected is tuned in. 5 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. The channels move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by press- ing c or d button or moving the joystick on the remote control lef t or right. 6 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the channels until a broad- cast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by pressing and holding c or d button or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . <CRB2163-B>51 TV tuner En 51 Section 12 TV tuner
Black plate (52,1) Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 you can easily store up to 12 broad- cast stations for later recall with the touch of a key . % When you find a station that you want to store in memory , keep touching one of preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 until the pre- set number stops flashing. The number you have touched will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected station has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the station is recalled from memor y . # T o switch between P01 âÂÂP06 and P07 âÂÂP12 , touch or . # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. # When P01 âÂÂP06 and P07 âÂÂP12 are not dis- played, you can display them by touching LIST . Notes ! Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV bands, can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations assigned to preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 . Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the TV picture, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the TV picture. <CRB2163-B>52 TV tuner En 52 Section 12
Black plate (53,1) Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially % T ouch BSSM on the function menu to turn BSSM on. BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored in order from the lowest channel up. When finished, BSSM disappears. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSSM again. Note Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re- place broadcast stations you have saved using P01 âÂÂP12 . Selecting the area group 1 T ouch COUNTRY on the function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the area group. T ouch c or d until the desired area group ap- pears in the display. COUNTR Y 1 (CCIR channel) âÂÂCOUNTRY 2 (IN channel) â COUNTR Y 3 (CHN channel) â COUNTR Y 4 (U.K. channel) âÂÂCOUNTRY 5 (OIRT channel) â COUNTR Y 6 (AUSTRALIA channel) â COUNTRY 7 (SAF channel) <CRB2163-B>53 TV tuner En 53 Section 12 TV tuner
Black plate (54,1) Listening to songs on your iPod 2 1 5 4 6 3 7 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Song number indicator Shows the number of song played in the se- lected list. 4 Repeat indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. 5 Shuffle indicator Shows when random play is set to Song or Album . 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent song. 7 Song information Shows detailed information of currently playing song. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch iPod to select the iPod. # When the iP od is not connected to this unit, you cannot select the iP od as a source. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another song, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next song. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current song. T ouching it again will skip to the previous song. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another song by pressing c or d button on the unit or moving the joystick on the remote control left or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d button on the unit or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. Note If the iPod contains no songs that can be played back, NO SONGS is displayed. Browsing for a song The operation of this unit to control an iP od is designed to be as close to the operation of the iP od as possible for easy operation and song search. 1 T ouch TOP to display the top menu. 2 T ouch one of the categories in which you want to search for a song. ! PLA YLISTS (playlists) <CRB2163-B>54 Playing songs on iPod En 54 Section 13
Black plate (55,1) ! ARTISTS (artists) ! ALBUMS (albums) ! SONGS (songs) ! GENRES (genres) 3 T ouch a list title that you want to play . Repeat this operation until you find the de- sired song. # Y ou can start a playback of all the songs in the selected list ( GENRES , ARTISTS or ALBUMS). T o do this, touch ALL . # T o go to the next group of list titles, touch . # T o return to the previous group of list titles, touch . # T o return to the previous menu, touch . # T o go to the top menu of the list search, touch TOP . Note If the playback stops for any reason, touch TOP and refine your search for a song. Pausing a song P ause lets you temporarily stop playback of a song. % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE appears in the display . # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Displaying text information on iPod T ext information recorded on the iP od can be displayed on the information bar . % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Song Title (song title) âÂÂArtist Name (artist name) â Album Title (album title) # If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compatible with a head unit, those characters will not be displayed. Note Y ou can scroll the title to the left by keeping touching DISP. Displaying information on song Song title, artist name, album title of the cur- rently playing song can be displayed (if they have been entered in iP od) together with the index and the remaining playback time in the form of the status bar . % T ouch FILE INFO to display information on the song you are currently playing. Song informatio n is displayed. ! Status bar shows the remaining playback time. The bar is filled up from the left to the right as the playback time is consumed. Repeating play Y ou can repeat one song over and over . ! While this unit is set to repea t one song, you cannot select the other songs. % T ouch to repeat one song. appears on the information bar and the currently playing song repeats. <CRB2163-B>55 Playing songs on iPod En 55 Section 13 Playing songs on iPod
Black plate (56,1) # When you do not set to repeat one song, this unit repeats all songs in the currently selected list (e.g. ARTISTS, ALBUMS). Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two random play methods: Song (play back songs in a random order) and Album (play back albums in a random order). % T ouch to select the random play method. T ouch repeatedly until the desired random play method appears in the display . ! Song â Play back songs in a random order within the selected list ! Album â Select an album randomly , and then play back all the songs in it in order # T o cancel the random play , touch repeat- edly to turn the shuffle icon off . <CRB2163-B>56 Playing songs on iPod En 56 Section 13
Black plate (57,1) Listening to songs on BT Audio (Bluetooth audio player) 4 3 2 1 If you connect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD - BTB100) to this unit, you can control Bluetooth audio player via Bluetooth wir eless technology . F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief informatio n on Blue- tooth audio player operations with this unit which slightly differes or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. ! Even though your audio player does not contain a Bluetooth module, you can still control it from this unit via Bluetooth wire- less technology. T o control your audio player by using this unit, connect a product featuring Bluetooth wireless technology (available on the market) to your audio player and connect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100) to this unit. Important ! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player con- nected to this unit, the available operations with this unit are limited to the following two levels: â Lower level: Only playing back songs on your audio player is possible. â Higher level: Playing back, pausing, select- ing songs, etc., are possible (all the opera- tions illustrated in this manual). ! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market, operations with your Bluetooth audio player using this unit var y in great range. Please refer to the in- struction manual that came with your Blue- tooth audio player as well as this manual while operating your player on this unit. ! Information about songs (e.g. the elapsed playing time, song title, song index, etc.) can- not be displayed on this unit. ! While you are listening to songs on your Blue- tooth audio player , please refrain from operat- ing on your cellular phone as much as possible. If you tr y operating on your cellular phone, the signal from your cellular phone may cause a noise on the song playback. ! When you are talking on the cellular phone connected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology , the song playback from your Blue- tooth audio player connected to this unit is muted. ! Even if while you are listening to song on your Bluetooth audio player you switch to another source, the playback of song continues to elapse. 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Device name Shows the device name of the connected Bluetooth audio player (or Bluetooth adap- ter). 4 Connection indicator Shows the Bluetooth wireless connection status. % T ouch the source icon and then touch BT Audio to select the Bluetooth audio source. <CRB2163-B>57 Bluetooth Audio En 57 Section 14 Bluetooth Audio
Black plate (58,1) Connecting a Bluetooth audio player 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . 3 T ouch CONNECT OPEN to turn the con- nection open on. ON is displayed. This unit is now on standby for connection from Bluetooth audio player . If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, the connection to this unit will be automatically established. Note Before you can use audio players you may need to enter the PIN code into this unit. If your player requires a PIN code to establish a connection, look for the code on the player or in its accompa- nying documentation . Enter the PIN code refer- ring to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 97. Playing songs on Bluetooth audio player 1 T ouch d. Playback starts. 2 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d button on the unit or moving the joystick on the remote control left or right. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d button on the unit or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. 4 T o pause the playback, touch e. Playback is paused. 1 <CRB2163-B>58 Bluetooth Audio En 58 Section 14
Black plate (59,1) Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . 3 T ouch DISCONNECT and then touch ON. After the disconnection is completed, No Connection is displayed. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . 3 T ouch DEVICE INFO to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! DEVICE NAME (device name of this unit) ! BD ADDRESS (address of Bluetooth device) ! SYSTEM VERSION (system version) ! BT MODULE VERSION (version of Blue- tooth module) <CRB2163-B>59 Bluetooth Audio En 59 Section 14 Bluetooth Audio
Black plate (60,1) Hands-free phoning with cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1 5 If you use Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100), you can connect a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology to this unit for hands-free, wireless calls, even while driving. F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief informatio n on the hands-free phoning operations with this unit which slightly differes or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. Important Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phones via Bluetooth wireless technol- ogy , using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Phone number Shows the phone number you selected. 4 User number indicator Shows the registration number of the cellu- lar phone. 5 Device name Shows the device name of the cellular phone. 6 Incoming call notice indication Shows when an incoming call has been re- ceived and not checked yet. ! Incoming call notice is not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit. 7 Automatic answering/Automatic re ject- ing indicator Shows when the automatic answering func- tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting the automatic answering on page 68). Shows when the automatic rejecting func- tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting the automatic rejecting on page 68). 8 Battery strength indicator Shows the batter y strength of cellular phone. ! Batter y strength indicator may differ from the actual batter y strength. ! If the batter y strength is not available, nothing is displayed in the batter y strength indicator area. 9 Signal level indicator Shows the signal strength of cellular phone. ! Signal level indicator may differ from the actual signal level. ! Depending on the cellular phones featur- ing Bluetooth wireless technology, radio field intensity is not available. In this case, the signal level indicator does not appear . % T ouch the source icon and then touch TEL to select the telephone. <CRB2163-B>60 Bluetooth T elephone En 60 Section 15
Black plate (61,1) Note Equalizer cur ve for the phone source is fixed. When selecting the phone source, you cannot op- erate Using the equalizer on page 71. Setting up for hands-free phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you will need to set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. This entails es- tablishing a Bluetooth wireless connection be- tween this unit and your phone, registering your phone with this unit, and adjusting the volume level. 1 Connection F or detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech- nology , refer to Connecting a cellular phone on the next page. # Y our phone should now be temporarily con- nected; however , to make best use of the technol- ogy , we recommend you register the phone to this unit. 2 Registration Refer to Registering connected cellular phone on page 63 for instructions on how to register your temporaril y connected phone. 3 V olume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume on your cellular phone for comfort. When adjusted, the volume level is memorized in this unit as the default setting. # Caller âÂÂs voice volume and ring volume may vary depending on the type of cellular phones. # If the difference between the ring volume and caller âÂÂs voice volume is big, overall volume level may become unstable. # Before disconnecting cellular phone from this unit, make sure to adjust the volume to proper level. If the volume has been muted (zero level) on your cellular phone, the volume level of your cellular phone remains muted even aft er the cel- lular phone is disconnecte d from this unit. Basic operation of hands- free phoning Important Advanced operations that require your attention such as dialing numbers on the monitor , using phone book, etc., are prohibited while you are driving. When you need to use these advanced operations, stop your vehicle in a safe place and operate. Making a phone call V oice recognition 1 T ouch VOICE to tur n the voice recogni- tion function on. V oice dial icon appears on the information bar . V oice recognition function is now ready . # T o cancel the voice recognition function, touch VOICE again . 2 Pronounce the name of your contact. T aking a phone call Answering an incoming call 1 When a call comes in, touch . T ouching switches between callers on hold. <CRB2163-B>61 Bluetooth T elephone En 61 Section 15 Bluetooth T elephone
Black plate (62,1) 2 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Rejecting an incoming call % When a call comes in, touch . The call is rejected. Answering a call waiting 1 T ouch to answer a call waiting. 2 T ouch to end the call. The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). # T ouching ends the call you are talking on. Or with some cellular phones, touching may end all calls including the calls on hold. Rejecting a call waiting % T ouch to re ject a call waiting. Introduction of advanced hands-free phoning operation 3 1 Function display Shows the function status. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Connecting a cellular phone Searching for available cellular phones 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. <CRB2163-B>62 Bluetooth T elephone En 62 Section 15
Black plate (63,1) 2 T ouch to search for available cellular phones. While searching, Search flashes. When avail- able cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wire- less technology are found, device names or Name Not Found (if names cannot be ob- tained) are displayed. # If this unit fails to find any available cellular phones, Not Found is displayed. 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, Connect flashes. T o com- plete the connection, please check the device name ( Pioneer BT unit) and enter the link code on your cellular phone. If the connection is established, Connected is displayed. # The link code is set to 0000 as default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 97. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch CONNECT OPEN. The unit is now on standby for connection from cellular phone. 3 Use cellular phone to connect to this unit. # The link code is set to 0000 as default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 97. Disconnecting a cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DISCONNECT to disconnect the currently connected cellular phone from this unit. After the disconnection is completed, No Connection is displayed. Registering connected cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. Registration assignments appear on the dis- play . F rom the top to the third assignment are for User phone 1, 2 and 3. The rest two assign- ments are for Guest phone 1 and 2. 2 T ouch and hold one of the re gistration assignments to register the currenctly con- nected phone. If the registration is succeeded, the device name of the connected phone is displayed in the selected assignment. # If the assignment is empty , No Data is dis- played. If the assignment is already taken, the de- vice name appears. T o replace an assignment with a new phone, first delete the current assign- ment. For more detailed instructions, see Deleting a registered phone on the next page. # If the registration failed, device name of the connected phone is not displayed in the selected assignment. In this case, return to step 1 and tr y again. <CRB2163-B>63 Bluetooth T elephone En 63 Section 15 Bluetooth T elephone
Black plate (64,1) Deleting a registered phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. 2 T ouch DELETE next to the device name you want to delete. A confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the phone. # T o cancel, touch NO. Connecting to a registered cellular phone Connecting to a register ed phone manually 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DIRECT CONNECT. 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, Connect is flashing. If the connection is established, Connected is dis- played. Connecting to a register ed phone automatically % T ouch AUTO CONNECT on the function menu to turn the Automatic Connection function on. If your cellular phone is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection , the connection to this unit will be automatically established. # T o turn automatic connection off , touch AUTO CONNECT again. Using the Phone Book T ransferring entries to the Phone Book The Phone Book can hold a total of 500 en- tries; 300 from User 1, 150 from User 2, and 50 from User 3. 1 T ouch PHONE BOOK TRANSFER on the function menu. 2 T ouch ST ART to turn the Phone Book T ransfer function on. The Phone Book T ransfer is now on standby. 3 Use cellular phone to perform phone book transfer . P er form phone book transfer using the cellu- lar phone. F or detailed instruction on this, refer to the instruction manual that came with your cellular phone. # The display indicates how many entries have been transferred and the total number to be transferred. # T o cancel the transferring process, touch STOP . 4 When you are done transferring Phone Book entries, touch ESC. Note When the phone book transfer is complete, the connection to your cellular phone is off . T o use the Phone Book, connect to your cellular phone once again, referring to Connecting to a r egistered cellular phone on this page. <CRB2163-B>64 Bluetooth T elephone En 64 Section 15
Black plate (65,1) Changing the Phone Book display order % T ouch PHONE BOOK NAME VIEW on the function menu to turn Phone Book Name View function on. Display order for the Phone Book is changed. # T o change to the other display order , touch PHONE BOOK NAME VIEW again. Calling a number in the Phone Book Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . 1 On the normal display , touch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 T ouch a or b to select the first letter of the name you are looking for . T ouching a or b changes alphabetical letters. 3 T ouch ENTER to show entries starting with the letter you chose. The display shows the first six Phone Book en- tries starting with that letter (e.g. âÂÂBen â , â Brianâ and â Burtâ when â Bâ is selected). # T ouch or to display other phone book en- tries. # T o refine the search with a different letter , touch CLEAR. 4 T ouch a Phone Book entry you want to call. The display is switched to the Phone Book edit display . 5 T ouch phone number of the Phone Book entry you want to call. If several phone numbers are entered to an entr y , touch one you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the Phone Book entr y you selected is dis- played on the information bar . # If you do not want to call the selected phone number but remove it from the information bar , touch PHONE BOOK and then touch ESC . 6 T ouch to make a call. ! F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . 7 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Editing the name of a Phone Book entry Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . 1 On the normal display , touch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. See step two to three on Calling a number in the Phone Book on this page for how to do this. 3 T ouch EDIT next to the Phone Book entry name. The display is changed to the Phone Book edit display . 4 T ouch 123 or ABC to select the desired character type. Select ABC to input alphabet. Select 123 to input numbers and symbols. <CRB2163-B>65 Bluetooth T elephone En 65 Section 15 Bluetooth T elephone
Black plate (66,1) ! Each time you touch ABC , the alphabet type changes among upper case, lower case and symbol. 5 T ouch a or b to select an alphabet let- ter or number/symbol. 6 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position and edit the name. When the letter you want is displayed, touch d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . T ouch c to move backwards in the display. 7 T ouch OK to store the new name. Editing phone numbers Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . 1 On the normal display , touch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. See step two to three on Calling a number in the Phone Book on the previous page for how to do this. 3 T ouch EDIT next to the phone number you want to edit. The display is changed to the Phone Book dial edit display. 4 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input numbers. # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. 5 T ouch c or d to move the cursor and edit the number . Repeat these steps until you have finished changing. 6 T ouch OK to store the new number . Clearing a Phone Book entry Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . 1 On the normal display , touch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to delete. See step two to three on Calling a number in the Phone Book on the previous page for how to do this. 3 T ouch DELETE to delete the Phone Book entry . A confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the entr y . # T o cancel, touch NO. Using the Call History Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . The 12 most recent calls made (dialed), re- ceived and missed, are stored in the Call His- tor y . Y ou can browse the Call History and call numbers from it. <CRB2163-B>66 Bluetooth T elephone En 66 Section 15
Black plate (67,1) 1 On the normal display , touch LOG to display the Call History . T ouching LOG repeatedly switches between the following call histories: MISSED CALL LIST â DIALED CALL LIST â RECEIVED CALL LIST # T ouching DISP here switches between the phone number and the caller âÂÂs name (if it is in the Phone Book). 2 T ouch a phone number or name (if en- tered) you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the phone number you selected is displayed on the information bar . 3 T ouch to make a call. Using preset numbers Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . Assigning preset numbers Numbers that you dial frequently can be as- signed to presets for quick recall. Y ou can assign up to 6 frequently called phone numbers to number presets. 1 Select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call History . Or di- rectly enter a desired phone number . T o select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call Histor y , see the in- structions explained in previous pages. T o di- rectly enter a desired phone number , see Making a call by entering phone number on the next page. The display should now be the normal display and the selected phone number is displayed on the information bar . 2 On the normal display , touch LIST to display preset assignments. P reset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). 3 Keep touching one of pre set assign- ments to store the phone number . The phone number you selected is stored in presets. # No Data is displayed for empty assignment. Even if the assignment is taken, you can replace it to the new one by keeping touching the assign- ment. Recalling preset numbers 1 On the normal display , touch LIST to display preset assignments. P reset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). 2 T ouch one of preset assignments . The selected phone number should now be displayed on the information bar . 3 T ouch to make a call. 4 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). <CRB2163-B>67 Bluetooth T elephone En 67 Section 15 Bluetooth T elephone
Black plate (68,1) Making a call by entering phone number Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . 1 On the normal display , touch DIRECT to display the direct dial display . 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input numbers. # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. # Up to 24 digits can be entered. # If you want to store the entered phone number to preset assignment, touch SET here. The display returns to the normal display and the phone num- ber you entered is selected. 3 When you completed entering the number , touch to make a call. 4 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Clearing memory 1 T ouch CLEAR MEMOR Y on the function menu. 2 T ouch CLEAR next to the item you want to delete from the memory . Select from the following: ! PHONE BOOK (phone book) ! DIALED CALLS (dialed call histor y) ! RECEIVED CALLS (received call histor y) ! MISSED CALLS (missed call histor y) ! PRESET DIALS (preset phone numbers) After selecting a desired item, a confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the mem- or y . # T o cancel, touch NO. # T ouch All clear to clear the memor y of all items. Setting the automatic answering % T ouch AUTO ANSWER on the function menu to turn the automatic answer on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn the automatic answer off , touch AUTO ANSWER again. Setting the automatic rejecting % T ouch REFUSE ALL CALLS on the func- tion menu to tur n the automatic call rejec- tion on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn the automatic call rejection off , touch REFUSE ALL CALLS again. Switching the ring tone % T ouch RING TONE on the function menu to tur n the ring tone on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn the ring tone off , touch RING TONE again. <CRB2163-B>68 Bluetooth T elephone En 68 Section 15
Black plate (69,1) Echo canceling and noise reduction % T ouch ECHO CANCEL on the function menu to turn Echo Cancel function on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn echo canceling off , touch ECHO CANCEL again. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address % T ouch Device info on the function menu to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! DEVICE NAME (device name of this unit) ! BD ADDRESS (address of Bluetooth device) ! SYSTEM VERSION (version of this unit âÂÂs microprocessor) ! BT MODULE VERSION (version of Blue- tooth module) <CRB2163-B>69 Bluetooth T elephone En 69 Section 15 Bluetooth T elephone
Black plate (70,1) Introduction of audio adjustments 1 1 Audio display Shows the audio function names. Important If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7650/DEQ- P6600) is connected to this unit, the audio func- tion will be changed to the multi-channel proces- sor âÂÂs audio menu. For details, refer to Introduction of DSP adjustments on page 75. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch AUDIO to display the audio func- tion names. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # Only when the PREOUT setting in the initial menu is FULL , NON FADING will be displayed in- stead of SUB WOOFER . (Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 94.) # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automat ically re- turned to the source display . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide you an ideal listening envir- onment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch FADER BALANCE on the audio function menu. # When the rear output setting is SUB. W , BALANCE will be displayed instead of FADER BALANCE . Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 94. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/r ear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :15 to REAR:15 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR:00 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. # When the rear output setting is SUB. W , you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 94. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the lef t or the right. LEFT :09 to RIGHT :09 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from lef t to right. <CRB2163-B>70 Audio Adjustments En 70 Section 16
Black plate (71,1) Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are six stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer curves: Display Equalizer curve Powerful P ower ful Natural Natural V ocal V ocal Custom Custom Flat Flat Super Bass Supe r bass ! Custom is an adjusted equalizer cur ve that you create. ! A separate Custom cur ve can be created for each source. If you make adjustments, the equalizer cur ve settings will be memor- ized in Custom . ! When Flat is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer cur ve. % On any source, touch EQ (displayed at the left bottom corn er) to select the equali- zer . T ouch EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: Powerful âÂÂNatural âÂÂV ocal âÂÂCustom âÂÂFlat â Super Bass Adjusting equalizer curves Y ou can adjust the currently selected equalizer cur ve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer cur ve settings are memorized in Custom. ! Y ou can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (cur ve characteristics) of each currently selec ted cur ve band ( LOW/ MID/ HIGH ). Level (dB) Center frequency Q=2N Q=2W F requency (Hz) 1 T ouch EQ MENU on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch c or d on the BAND setting to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) 3 T ouch c or d on the LEVEL setting to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the equalization band. 6 to âÂÂ6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. 4 T ouch c or d on the FREQUENCY set- ting to select the desired frequency . T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display. Low : 40Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ160Hz Mid: 200Hz â 500Hz â 1kHz âÂÂ2kHz High: 3.15kHz âÂÂ8kHz âÂÂ10kHz âÂÂ12.5kHz 5 T ouch c or d on the Q.F ACTOR setting to select the desired Q factor . T ouch c or d until the desired Q factor ap- pears in the display. 2N âÂÂ1N âÂÂ1W âÂÂ2W <CRB2163-B>71 Audio Adjustments En 71 Section 16 Audio Adjustments
Black plate (72,1) Note If you make adjustments, Custom cur ve is up- dated. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 T ouch LOUDNESS on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch c on the LOUDNESS setting to turn loudness on. # T o turn loudness off , touch d. 3 T ouch c or d on the MODE setting to select a desired level. Each time you touch c or d selects level in the following order: LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off . ! When the subwoofer output is on, you can adjust the cut-off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . 1 T ouch SUB WOOFER on the audio func- tion menu. # When the PREOUT setting in the initial menu is FULL , you cannot select SUB WOOFER . 2 T ouch c on the SUBWOOFER setting to turn subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch d. 3 T ouch c or d on the PHASE setting to select the phase of subwoofer output. T ouch d to select normal phase and NORMAL appears in the display . T ouch c to select reverse phase and REVERSE appears in the display. 4 T ouch c or d on the LEVEL setting to adjust the output level of the subwoofer . Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the subwoofer . 6 to â 6 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. 5 T ouch c or d on the FREQUENCY set- ting to select cut-off frequency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the sub- woofer . Using nonfading output When the nonfading output setting is on, the audio signal does not pass through this unit âÂÂs low pass filter (for the subwoofer), but is out- putted through the RCA output. 1 T ouch NON F ADING on the audio func- tion menu. # When the PREOUT setting in the initial menu is only FULL , you can select NON F ADING . (Re fer to page 94.) 2 T ouch c on the NON FADING setting to turn non fading output on. # T o turn non fading output off , touch d. 3 T ouch c or d on the LEVEL setting to adjust the output level of the non fading. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the non fading. 6 to â 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. <CRB2163-B>72 Audio Adjustments En 72 Section 16
Black plate (73,1) Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are outputted from the front or rear speakers. 1 T ouch HPF on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch c to turn high pass filter on. High pass filter is turned on and the cut-off fre- quency setting becomes available. # T o turn high pass filter off , touch d. 3 T ouch c or d to select cut-off fre- quency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ125Hz Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 T ouch SLA on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch a or b it increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 to âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD and MP3/WMA are set to the same source level adjustment volume auto - matically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! AUX (auxiliar y input) and AV (AV input) are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! SLA function does not adjust the volume for the BT telephone source. Staging for car environment Y ou can create in car a sound environment that can be best matched with the type of your listening music (or movie). 1 T ouch ST AGING on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch a desired staging field. ! OFF (off) ! MUSIC STUDIO (music studio) ! DYNAMIC THEA TER (dynamic theater) ! ACTOR âÂÂS ST AGE (actor âÂÂs stage) ! RELAX LIVING (relaxing living room) <CRB2163-B>73 Audio Adjustments En 73 Section 16 Audio Adjustments
Black plate (74,1) Selecting the listening position One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. Se- lecting the listening position lets you automa- tically adjust the speaker output levels and inserts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. When used with the staging function, the sound image will be more natural and you can feel as if a panora- mic sound envelops you. 1 T ouch POSITION on the staging menu. 2 T ouch one of the listening positions where you want to focus the sound image. ! LEFT (lef t) ! CENTER (center) ! RIGHT (right) Note When you make adjustments to the listening po- sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels. Y ou can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . <CRB2163-B>74 Audio Adjustments En 74 Section 16
Black plate (75,1) Introduction of DSP adjustments 1 Y ou can use this unit to contr ol multi-channel processor (e.g. DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600), which is sold separately . ! Some functions may differ depending on the multi-channel processor connected to this unit. By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in the order shown, you can create a fi- nely-tuned sound field effortlessly. 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) 4 Adjusting the time alignment 5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 6 Selecting a cross-over frequency 7 Adjusting the speaker output levels 8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer 1 DSP display Shows the DSP function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch DSP to display the DSP function names. The DSP function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , you cannot use audio functions. Also, equalizer cur ve setting, POSITION , AUTO EQ and AUTO T A will be can- celled. # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , audio is outputted from front speakers only . # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to D.R.C . # When neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is se- lected in POSITION , you cannot switch to TIME ALIGNMENT . # When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting, you cannot switch to DOLBY PRO LOGIC II . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the DSP function within about 30 seconds, the display is automat ically re- turned to the source display . Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. <CRB2163-B>75 Digital Signal Processor En 75 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (76,1) 1 T ouch POSITION on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c/ d/ a / b to select a listening po- sition. T ouch one of these, c/ d/ a/ b, to select a lis- tening position as listed in the table. Key Display Position c FRONT -L F ront seat left d FRONT -R F ront seat right a FRONT F ront seats b ALL All seats # T o cancel the selected listening position, touch the same key again. Note When you make adjustments to the listening po- sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels. Y ou can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide you an ideal listening envir- onment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch FADER/BALANCE on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/r ear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :25 to REAR:25 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR:00 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the lef t or the right. LEFT :25 to RIGHT :25 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from lef t to right. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 T ouch SLA on the DSP function menu. 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch a or b it increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 to âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. <CRB2163-B>76 Digital Signal Processor En 76 Section 17
Black plate (77,1) ! Video CD, CD and MP3/WMA are set to the same source level adjustment volume auto - matically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! AUX (auxiliar y input) and AV (AV input) are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and softest sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. ! When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to D.R.C. 1 T ouch D.R.C on the DSP function menu. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch this mode. 2 T ouch ON to turn the dynamic range control on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , touch OFF . Using the down-mix function Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. 1 T ouch DOWN MIX on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired level. T ouch c to select Lo/Ro. T ouch d to select Lt/Rt . ! Lo/Ro â Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as sur- round components. ! Lt/Rt â Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). Using the direct control Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. ! All audio functions are locked out when the direct control is on except VOLUME. 1 T ouch DIGIT AL DIRECT on the DSP func- tion menu. 2 T ouch ON to turn the direct control on. # T o turn direct control off , touch OFF. Using the Dolby Pro Logic II Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two -channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no ef- fect on other types of source. 1 T ouch DOLBY PRO LOGIC II on the DSP function menu. <CRB2163-B>77 Digital Signal Processor En 77 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (78,1) 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. ! MOVIE â The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! MUSIC â The Music mode suitable for music playback ! MA TRIX â The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak ! OFF â T urn Dolby P ro Logic II off ! ADJUST â Adjust the Music mode # Y ou can operate ADJUST only when MUSIC has been selected. Adjusting the Music mode Y ou can adjust the Music mode with the fol- lowing three controls. ! P anorama ( P ANORAMA ) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting âÂÂwraparound â ef- fect. ! Dimension ( DIMENSION ) allows you to gradually adjust the sound field either to- wards the front or the rear . ! Center Width Control ( CENTER WIDTH) al- lows center-channel sounds to be posi- tioned between the center speaker and the left/right speakers. It improves the lef t-cen- ter-right stage presentation for both the dri- ver and the front passenger . 1 T ouch DOLBY PRO LOGIC II on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch MUSIC and then touch ADJUST. # Y ou can operate ADJUST only when MUSIC has been selected. 3 T ouch a or b to select P ANORAMA (pa- norama). Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: P ANORAMA (panorama) âÂÂDIMENSION (di- mension) â CENTER WIDTH (center width) 4 T ouch c to turn the panorama control on. # T o turn the panorama control off , touch d. 5 T ouch b to select DIMENSION and then touch c or d to adjust fr ont/surround speaker balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the sound towards the front or the surrounds. 3 to âÂÂ3 is displayed as the front/surround speaker balance moves from front to sur- rounds. 6 T ouch b to select CENTER WIDTH and then touch c or d to adjust the center image. Each time you touch c or d it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 0 to 7 . 3 is the default and it âÂÂs recommended for most recordings. 0 places all center sound in the center speaker . 7 places all center sound equally in the lef t/right speakers. Setting the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LARGE (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Otherwise select SMALL (small). ! When DIGIT AL DIRECT is on, you cannot select SPEAKER SETTING . First turn the DIGIT AL DIRECT off , referring to Using the direct control on the previous page. ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SMALL or OFF . ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF. <CRB2163-B>78 Digital Signal Processor En 78 Section 17
Black plate (79,1) ! Set the front or rear speaker to LARGE if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 T ouch SPEAKER SETTING on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) âÂÂPHASE (subwoo - fer setting) # Y ou can switch to PHASE only when the sub- woofer has been set to ON . 3 T ouch c or d to select the correct size for the selected speaker . Each time you touch c or d selects the size in the following order: Speaker Setting FRONT SMALL âÂÂLARGE CENTER OFF âÂÂSMALL âÂÂLARGE REAR OFF âÂÂSMALL âÂÂLARGE SUB WOOFER ON âÂÂOFF PHASE REVERSE âÂÂNORMAL Correcting the subwoofer â s phase If trying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn â t do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer âÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, try changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . 1 T ouch SPEAKER SETTING on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select SUB WOOFER. Each time you touch c or d selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) âÂÂPHASE (subwoo - fer setting) 3 T ouch c to turn subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch d. 4 T ouch d to select PHASE and then touch c or d to select the phase of sub- woofer output. T ouch d to select NORMAL (normal phase). T ouch c to select REVERSE (reverse phase). Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Pro Logic turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur : ! No audio is outputted if the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE and no center speaker is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE . Adjusting the speaker output levels Y ou can readjust the speaker output levels using a test tone while listening to music. 1 T ouch SPEAKER LEVEL on the DSP func- tion menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects the speak- er in the following order: <CRB2163-B>79 Digital Signal Processor En 79 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (80,1) FRONT -L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT -R (front speaker right) â REAR-R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR-L (rear speaker lef t) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set to OFF at the SPEAKER SETTING menu. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. Note T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at TEST TONE . Both provide the same results. Selecting a cross-over frequency Y ou can select a frequency , under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo - fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SMALL, you can select a frequency , under which sounds are repro- duced through a LARGE speaker or subwoo- fer . 1 T ouch CROSS OVER on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) 3 T ouch c or d to select cross-over fre- quency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 (Hz) Note Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a cross- over frequency of the subwoofer âÂÂs L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SMALL speaker H.P .F . (high- pass filter). The cross-over frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LARGE or OFF . Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone This function allows you to easily get the over- all balance right among the speakers. 1 T ouch TEST TONE on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch ST ART to start the test tone out- put. The test tone is outputted. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter vals of about two seconds. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display . FRONT -L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT -R (front speaker right) â REAR-R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR-L (rear speaker lef t) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 5 to stop the test tone. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set OFF . <CRB2163-B>80 Digital Signal Processor En 80 Section 17
Black plate (81,1) 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. 4 T ouch STOP to stop the test tone out- put. Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their âÂÂab- solute â output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on page 79.) ! T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker out- put levels at SPEAKE R LEVEL . Both provide the same results. Using the time alignment Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The time alignment lets you adjust the dis- tance between each speaker and the listening position. 1 T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the time alignment. ! INITIAL â Initial time alignment (factor y set- ting) ! AUTO T A â Time alignment created by auto T A and EQ. (Refer to A uto T A and EQ (auto- time alignment and auto -equalizing) on page 84.) ! CUSTOM â Adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself ! OFF â T urn the time alignment off ! ADJUST â Adjust the time alignment as de- sired # Y ou cannot select AUTO T A if auto TA and EQ has not been carried out. # Y ou cannot select ADJUST when neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is selected in POSITION . Adjusting the time alignment Y ou can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. ! An adjusted time alignment is memorized in CUSTOM. 1 T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT on the DSP function menu and then touch ADJUST. # Y ou cannot select ADJUST when neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is selected in POSITION . 2 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT -L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT -R (front speaker right) â REAR-R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR-L (rear speaker lef t) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the distance be- tween the selected speaker and the listen- ing position. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the distance. 0.0 â 500.0 [cm] is dis- played as the distance is increased or decreased. 4 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . <CRB2163-B>81 Digital Signal Processor En 81 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (82,1) Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer curves: Display Equ alizer curve Powerful P ower ful Natural Natural V ocal V ocal Flat Flat Custom1 Custom 1 Custom2 Custom 2 Super Bass Super bass ! Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equal- izer cur ves. ! When Flat is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer cur ve. % On the normal display , touch EQ to se- lect the equalizer . T ouch EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: Powerful âÂÂNatural âÂÂV ocal âÂÂFlat âÂÂCustom1 â Custom2â Super Bass # If SFC instead of EQ appears on the normal display , touch SFC and hold to switch to equalizer function. About SFC, refer to Using the sound field control on this page. Using the sound field control The SFC function creates the sensation of a live per formance. ! One of the greatest advantages to hear music in live is the original acoustic sound that is echoed or reflected against the stage surroundings. The SFC circuitr y en- ables to reproduce the live per forming sound in car environment by programming the direct sound, early reflections, and late reflections effects and characterizing the sound from CD, DVD or other medium so it becomes closer to the live acoustic sound. 1 On the normal display , touch EQ and hold to switch to SFC function. T ouch EQ and hold until Sound Field Control appears in the display . # T o switch to equalizer function, touch EQ and hold again. 2 T ouch SFC to select the desired SFC mode. T ouch SFC repeatedly to switch between the following modes: MUSICAL (musical) âÂÂDRAMA (drama) â ACTION (actio n) âÂÂJAZZ (jazz) âÂÂHALL (hall) â CLUB (club) âÂÂOFF (off) Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2- channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channe l audio (i.e., MUSICAL, DRAMA or ACTION), we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic II on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ , HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic II off . <CRB2163-B>82 Digital Signal Processor En 82 Section 17
Black plate (83,1) Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Fo r Custom1 and Custom2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the front, rear and center equalizer cur ves separately by selecting a cen- ter frequency , an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate Custom1 cur ve can be created for each source. ! A Custom2 cur ve can be created common to all sources. ! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn âÂÂt easy . W e recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other spea kers. % T ouch P ARAMETRIC EQ on the DSP function menu. Note Y ou can select a center frequency for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-oc- tave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that have inter vals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. Speaker select 1 T ouch c or d to select SP-SEL. Each time you touch c or d selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) â BAND (bands) â FREQUENCY (center frequency) âÂÂLEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 2 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. T ouch c or d until the desired speaker ap- pears in the display. REAR (rear speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speak- er) â FRONT (front speakers) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . Band 1 T ouch c or d to select BAND. Each time you touch c or d selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) â BAND (bands) â FREQUENCY (center frequency) âÂÂLEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 2 T ouch c or d to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) Frequency 1 T ouch c or d to select FREQUENCY. Each time you touch c or d selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) â BAND (bands) â FREQUENCY (center frequency) âÂÂLEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 2 T ouch c or d to select the center fre- quency of selected band. T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display. 40Hz âÂÂ50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz â 160Hzâ 200Hzâ 250Hzâ 315Hzâ 400Hzâ 500Hz âÂÂ630Hz âÂÂ800Hz âÂÂ1kHz âÂÂ1.25kHz â 1.6kHz âÂÂ2kHz âÂÂ2.5kHz âÂÂ3.15kHz âÂÂ4kHz â 5kHz âÂÂ6.3kHz âÂÂ8kHz âÂÂ10kHz âÂÂ12.5kHz <CRB2163-B>83 Digital Signal Processor En 83 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (84,1) Level 1 T ouch c or d to select LEVEL. Each time you touch c or d selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) â BAND (bands) â FREQUENCY (center frequency) âÂÂLEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 2 T ouch c or d to adjust the equalizer level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the equalizer level. 06 to â 06 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. Q factor 1 T ouch c or d to select Q. FACTOR. Each time you touch c or d selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) â BAND (bands) â FREQUENCY (center frequency) âÂÂLEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired Q factor . Each time you touch c or d switches between the following Q factor: NARROW (narrow) âÂÂWIDE (wide) # Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way . Using the auto-equalizer The auto -equalizer is the equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto T A and EQ (refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto -equalizing) on this page). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . 1 T ouch AUTO EQ on the DSP function menu. # Y ou cannot use this function if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. 2 T ouch ON to turn the auto-equalizer on. # T o turn auto -equalizer off , touch OFF. Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The auto -time alignment is automatically ad- justed for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The auto -equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates the auto -equalizer cur ve based on that information. WARNING T o prevent accidents, never carr y out auto T A and EQ while driving. When this function measure s the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto-equalizer cur ve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. CAUTION ! Carr ying out auto T A and EQ under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly be- fore carr ying out auto TA and EQ. â When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) â When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker âÂÂs maximum input power capabil- ity . ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measure ment tone may become loud and measuremen t may take a long time, resulting in a drain on batter y power . Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. <CRB2163-B>84 Digital Signal Processor En 84 Section 17
Black plate (85,1) Before operating the auto T A and EQ function ! Carr y out auto T A and EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air conditioning switched off . Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. Sounds other than the measurement tone (sur- rounding sounds, engine sound, tele- phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto T A and EQ using the supplied microphone. Using another microphone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! When front speaker is not connected, auto T A and EQ cannot be carried out. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto T A and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power amp âÂÂs input level to the standard position. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn off the LPF on the power amp before carr ying out auto T A and EQ. In addition, the cut-off frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency . ! The time alignment value calculated by auto T A and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. However , the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circum- stances, so please continue to use this value. â When the reflected sound within a vehi- cle is strong and delays occur . â When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. ! Auto T A and EQ changes the audio settings as below: â The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (R efer to page 76.) â The equalizer cur ve switches to Flat. (Refer to page 82.) â It will be adjusted automatically to high pass filter setting for front, center and rear speaker . ! If you carr y out auto T A and EQ when a pre- vious setting of this already exists, the set- ting will be replaced. Carrying out auto T A and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roof, and then turn the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver â s seat, fa- cing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto T A and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carr y out auto T A and EQ. 3 T ur n the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car â s air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. <CRB2163-B>85 Digital Signal Processor En 85 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (86,1) # P ress SOURCE to turn the source on if this unit is turned off . 4 Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. Refer to Using the position selector on page 75. # If no position is selected before you start auto T A and EQ, FRONT -L is selected automatically . 5 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 6 T ouch and hold EQ to enter the auto T A and EQ measurement mode. 7 Plug the microphone into the micro- phone input jack on the multi-channel pro - cessor . AUTO T A&EQ microphone F or details concerning operation, refer to the multi-channel processor âÂÂs operation manual. 8 T ouch ST ART to start the auto T A and EQ. 9 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers, and auto T A and EQ be- gins. # When all speaker s are connected, auto T A and EQ is completed in about nine minutes. # T o stop auto T A and EQ, touch STOP. # T o cancel auto T A and EQ part way through, touch BACK or ESC . 10 When auto T A and EQ is completed, Complete is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (Refer to Under- standing auto T A and EQ err or messages on page 105.) 11 T ouch ESC to cancel the auto T A and EQ mode. 12 Store the microp hone carefully in the glove compartment. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or mal- function. <CRB2163-B>86 Digital Signal Processor En 86 Section 17
Black plate (87,1) Introduction of setup adjustments 1 1 Setup menu display Shows the setup function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch SETUP to display the setup func- tion names. The setup function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the setup function within about 30 seconds, the display is automat ically re- turned to the source display . Setting the A V input Y ou can connect up to two A V components to this unit and display videos either on AV source or EXT source. Switch the A V input setting depending on the connected AV components. ! Select VIDEO to watch video of a con- nected component as AV source. ! Select EXT -V to watch video of a connected video unit as EXT source. ! Select B. CAMERA to watch a rear view camera video while you are backing your vehicle. When A V component is connected to A V input 1 % T ouch A V input on the setup menu to select the A V input 1 setting. T ouch A V input until the desired setting is se- lected. ! OFF â No video component is connected ! VIDEO â External video component (such as portable video player) ! EXT -V â External video unit (such as P io - neer products available in the future) # EXT -V can be selected only when external video unit is connected to this unit. When A V component is connected to A V input 2 1 T ouch AV INPUT 2 on the setup menu. 2 T ouch c or d on the A V INPUT 2 setting to select your desired setting. Each time you touch c or d it switches be- tween the following AV input 2 settings: ! OFF â No video component is connected ! B. CAMERA â Rear view camera ! VIDEO â External video component (such as portable video player) <CRB2163-B>87 Setup En 87 Section 18 Setup
Black plate (88,1) When rear view camera is connected to A V input 2 CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images, other- wise screen image may appear reversed. Y ou can install a rear view camera onto the A V input 2 and display a rear view camera video. When the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) posi- tion, the video automatically switches to a rear view camera video. (F or more details, consult your dealer .) ! After you set up the rear view camera set- ting, move the gear shift in REVERSE (R) and confirm if a rear view camera video can be shown on the display . ! If the display should be switched to a rear view camera video by error while you are driving for ward, change the rear view cam- era setting. ! T o end watching a rear view camera video and return to the source display , press V .ADJ . 1 T ouch AV INPUT 2 on the setup menu. 2 T ouch c or d on the A V INPUT 2 setting to select B. CAMERA. 3 T ouch c or d on the POLARITY setting to select an appropriate setting for polar - ity . Each time you touch c or d it switches be- tween the following polarity: ! BA TTER Y â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is positive while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! GND â When the polarity of the connected lead is negative while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 T ouch CLOCK ADJ on the setup menu. 2 T ouch OFF to turn the clock display on. ON will appear in the display instead of OFF . Clock display is now on. # T o turn the clock display off , touch ON. 3 T ouch c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. Each time you touch c or d it will select one segment of the clock display: Hour âÂÂMinute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will be highlighted. 4 T ouch a or b to set the clock. Each time you touch a it increases the se- lected hour or minute. Each time you touch b it decreases the selected hour or minute. Notes ! Y ou can match the clock to a time signal by touching JUST. â If the minute is 00 to 29, the minutes are rounded down. (e.g., 10:18 becomes 10:00 .) â If the minute is 30 to 59, the minutes are rounded up. (e.g., 10:36 becomes 11:00.) ! Even when the sources are off , the clock dis- play appears on the display . <CRB2163-B>88 Setup En 88 Section 18
Black plate (89,1) Selecting video on rear display Y ou can set the rear display to automatically switch to the A VG - VDP1 image with the front display . Alternatively , you can set it to remain showing the selected video source and not change with the front display . ! Y ou can operate this function only when a P ioneer V ehicle Dynamics P rocessor (A VG - VDP1) is connected to this unit. ! When selecting SOURCE and the selected source is an audio source, nothing is dis- played on the rear display . % T ouch REAR DISP on the setup menu to display video of the selected source on the rear display . T ouch REAR DISP until the desired video set- ting appears in the display . ! SOURCE â Display the video of the selected source on the rear display ! V .D.P . â Display the AVG- VDP1 on the rear display <CRB2163-B>89 Setup En 89 Section 18 Setup
Black plate (90,1) Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 1 Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. 1 While playing a DVD disc, touch g. Playback of the disc is stopped. SETUP will be displayed instead of MENU on the DVD menu. 2 T ouch SETUP. The DVD setup menu is displayed. 3 T ouch LANGUAGE to display the DVD language menu. T ouch VISUAL to display the DVD visual menu. The DVD function names categorized under the selected menu are displayed. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the DVD setup function within about 30 seconds, the display is automati- cally returned to the playback display. Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 T ouch SUB TITLE LANGUAGE on the DVD language menu. Subtitle language menu is displayed and the currently selec ted language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT. # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV. 2 T ouch the desired language. A subtitle language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on this page. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language by touching SUB TITLE during playback. (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during play- back (Multi-subtitle) on page 31.) ! Even if you use SUB TITLE during playback to switch the subtitle language , this does not af- fect the settings here. When you select OTHERS When you select OTHERS, a language code input display is shown. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 112 to input the four- digit code of the desired language. 1 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the language code. # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 2 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch ENTER. <CRB2163-B>90 DVD Setup En 90 Section 19
Black plate (91,1) Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 T ouch AUDIO LANGUAGE on the DVD language menu. Audio language menu is displayed and the currently selec ted language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT. # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV. 2 T ouch the desired language. The audio language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on the previous page. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language by touching AUDIO during playback. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 30.) ! Even if you use AUDIO during playback to switch the audio language , this does not af- fect the settings here. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 T ouch MENU LANGUAGE on the DVD language menu. A menu language menu is displayed and the currently set language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT. # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV. 2 T ouch the desired language. The menu language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on the previous page. Note If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is dis- played. Switching the assist subtitle on or off If assist subtitles are recorded on a DVD disc, you can display them by turning the assist subtitle function on. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD language menu. 2 T ouch ASSIST SUB TITLE to turn assist subtitles on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn the assist subtitle off , touch ASSIST SUB TITLE again. Setting the angle icon display With this function on, the angle icon appears when the scene can be played back by differ- ent angle. % T ouch MUL TI ANGLE on the DVD visual menu to turn the angle icon display on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn the angle icon display off , touch MUL TI ANGLE again. <CRB2163-B>91 DVD Setup En 91 Section 19 DVD Setup
Black plate (92,1) Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to -height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to VIDEO OUTPUT . ! When using a regular display , select either LETTER BOX or P ANSCAN . Selecting 16 : 9 may result in an unnatural picture. ! If you select the TV aspect, the unit âÂÂs dis- play changes to the same setting. 1 T ouch TV ASPECT on the DVD visual menu. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the TV aspect. ! 16 : 9 â Wi de screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX â The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P ANSCAN â The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P ANSCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select P ANSCAN setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (See page 11.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc âÂÂs in- structions. Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult- oriented scenes. Y ou can set the par- ental lock to your desired level. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level Y ou need to have registered a code number for playing back discs with parantal lock. 1 T ouch P ARENT AL on the DVD visual menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input a four digit code number . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 3 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch ENTER. The code number is set, and you can now set the level. 4 T ouch any of 1 âÂÂ8 to select the desired level. The parental lock level is set. ! LEVEL 8 â Playback of the entire disc is pos- sible (initial setting) ! LEVEL 7 to LEVEL 2 â Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! LEVEL 1 â Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Look for the level indication written at the disc package, included literature or on the disc it- self . P arental lock of this unit is not possible if a parental lock level is not recorded in the disc. <CRB2163-B>92 DVD Setup En 92 Section 19
Black plate (93,1) ! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac- tive only on the scenes with certain levels. The playback of those scenes will be skipped. For details, refer to the instruction manual that came with the discs. Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 T ouch P ARENT AL on the DVD visual menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the registered code number . 3 T ouch ENTER. This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. T ouch C and input the cor- rect code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 4 T ouch any of 1 âÂÂ8 to select the desired level. The new parental lock level is set. If you forget your code number Refer to Setting the code number and level on the previous page, and touch C 10 times. The registered code number is all cleared, letting you register a new one. <CRB2163-B>93 DVD Setup En 93 Section 19 DVD Setup
Black plate (94,1) Adjusting initial settings 2 1 Using the initial settings, you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal per- formance from this unit. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch OFF to turn this unit off. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . 2 T ouch AUDIO MENU and then touch INITIAL to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Switching the auxiliary setting Auxiliar y equipments connected to this unit can be activated individually . Set each AUX source to ON when using. About connecting or using auxiliar y equipments, refer to Using the AUX source on page 101. % T ouch AUX1/AUX2 on the initial menu to tur n each auxiliary setting on. # T o turn auxiliar y setting off , touch AUX1/ AUX2 again. Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit âÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put) can be used for full-range speaker ( FULL) or subwoofer ( SUB. W) connection. If you switch the rear output setting to SUB. W , you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliar y amp. Initially , the unit is set for rear full-range speak- er connection ( FULL). When rear output is connected to full range speakers (when FULL is selected), you can connect the RCA sub- woofer output to a subwoofer . In this case, you can select whether to use the subwoofer con- troller â s (low pass filter , phase) built-in SUB.W or the auxiliar y FULL . ! When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you cannot operate this function. 1 T ouch REAR SP on the initial menu. 2 T ouch c or d on the REAR SPEAKER to switch the rear output setting. T ouch c to select full-range speaker and FULL appears in the display . T ouch d to select sub- woofer and SUB. W appears in the display . # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select FULL. <CRB2163-B>94 Initial Setup En 94 Section 20
Black plate (95,1) # When a subwoo fer is connected to the rear output, set for subwoofer SUB. W . # When the rear output setting is SUB. W , you cannot change the subwoo fer controller . 3 T ouch c or d on the PREOUT setting to switch the subwoofer output or non fading output. T ouch c to select subwoofer output and SUB.W appears in the display . T ouch d to se- lect non fading output and FULL appears in the display. Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there is no output unless you turn the nonfading output (refer to Using nonfading output on page 72) or subwoofer output (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 72) in the audio menu on. ! If you change the subwoofer controller , sub- woofer output and nonfadin g output in the audio menu return to the factor y settings. Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 kHz, the preset step, and 50 kHz. % T ouch FM STEP on the initial menu to select the FM tuning step. T ouching FM STEP will switch the FM tuning step between 50 kHz and 100 kHz. The se- lected FM tuning step will appear in the dis- play . Note If seek tuning is per formed in 50 kHz steps, sta- tions may be tuned in imprecisely . T une in the sta- tions with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 kHz, the preset step, and 10 kHz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 kHz (531 kHz to 1 602 kHz allowable) to 10 kHz (530 kHz to 1 640 kHz allowable). % T ouch AM STEP on the initial menu to select the AM tuning step. T ouching AM STEP will switch the AM tuning step between 9 kHz and 10 kHz. The selected AM tuning step will appear in the display . Changing languages for CAUTION Some operations on this unit are prohibited while driving or needs to be paid a careful at- tention when operating. In such case, a cau- tion appears on the display . Y ou can change the language of the cautions at this setting. % T ouch CAUTION on the initial menu to select your desired language. Each time you touch CAUTION, the language for CAUTION is switched. Switching the sound muting/attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenu- ated autom atically when the signal from the equipment with mute function is received. ! The sound is turned off , MUTE is displayed and no audio adjustments are possible. ! The sound is attenuated, AT T is displayed and no audio adjustments, except volume control, are possible. <CRB2163-B>95 Initial Setup En 95 Section 20 Initial Setup
Black plate (96,1) ! Sound from this system returns to normal when the muting or attenuation is can- celed. % T ouch TEL/GUIDE on the initial menu to select any of the muting, attenuation or off. T ouch TEL/GUIDE until the desired setting ap- pears in the display. ! MUTE â Muting ! A TT -20dB â Attenuation (A TT -20dB has a stronger effect than A TT -10dB ) ! A TT -10dB â Attenuation ! OFF â T urn the sound muting/attenuation off Notes ! The sound is muted or attenuated, MUTE or AT T are displayed and no audio adjustment is possible. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection or the voice guidance is ended. Mixing A VG-VDP1 beep an d audio sound When connecting the AVG-VDP1 to this unit, a beep sound is occasionally outputted from the AVG- VDP1. T o ensure the quality audio sound from this unit, set this function to GUIDE to properly mix the beep sound and the audio sound. ! Y ou can operate this function only when a P ioneer V ehicle Dynamics P rocessor (A VG - VDP1) is connected to this unit. ! When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you cannot use this function. ! W e recommend that you select GUIDE to ensure quality sound. % T ouch VDP MIX on the initial menu to switch the mixing of A VG-VDP1 beep. T ouching VDP MIX switches the mixing set- tings between ALL (mixing all the time) and GUIDE (mixing when a beep sound is out- putted). Correcting distorted sound Y ou can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer curve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW. Normally , leave the set- ting at HIGH to ensure quality sound. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. % T ouch D. A TT on the initial menu to switch the digital attenuator setting. T ouching D. A TT switches the digital attenua- tor settings in the following order: HIGH âÂÂLOW Setting the TV signal When this unit is connected to a TV tuner , you need to adjust the TV signal suitable to your countr y TV signal setting. ! This function is initially set to AUTO so that this unit automatically adjusts the TV signal setting. % T ouch TV SIG on the initial menu to se- lect an appropriate TV signal. T ouching TV SIG switches TV signal settings in the following order: AUTO â PA L âÂÂNTSC âÂÂP AL-M âÂÂSECAM <CRB2163-B>96 Initial Setup En 96 Section 20
Black plate (97,1) Note About your country TV signal, consult with your nearest P ioneer dealer . Resetting the audio functions Y ou can reset all audio functions except vo- lume. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch RESET on the initial menu. Proceed with re set? appears and asks you to confirm it. 2 T ouch RESET again to reset audio func- tions. Reset completed is displayed and the audio settings are reset. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, touch CANCEL . Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection With some Bluetooth audio players, you may be required to enter to this unit in advance PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player , in order to set this unit ready for a connection from your Bluetooth audio player . ! Only when Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD - BTB100) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch PIN code input on the initial menu. PIN code input display appears. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player . # T ouch C to delete the number . 3 After inputting PIN code (up to 16 di- gits), touch ENTER. The PIN code you entered is stored in this unit. Extending the vehicle â s antenna At the standard setting, the antenna of your vehicle is automatically retracted when you se- lect the source OFF or when the ignition switch is at ACC. At this setting, the source re- mains OFF even when you receive an incom- ing call through Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD- BTB100). If you want to take the incoming calls you receive on the OFF source, turn AUTO ANT MODE off . The OFF source will be switched to T elephone and the antenna of your vehicle will be extended when this unit re- ceives an incoming call. ! Only when Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD - BTB100) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. % T ouch AUTO ANT MODE on the initial menu to turn the auto antenna mode off. The vehicle â s antenna will be extended and the source will be switched to T elephone ever y time you receive an incoming call. # T o turn the auto antenna mode on, touch AUTO ANT MODE again. <CRB2163-B>97 Initial Setup En 97 Section 20 Initial Setup
Black plate (98,1) Adjusting the screen Changing the wide screen mod e Y ou can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. % Press WIDE to select the desired set- ting. P ress WIDE repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FULL (full) âÂÂJUST (just) âÂÂCINEMA (cinema) â ZOOM (zoom) âÂÂNORMAL (normal) # When AVG-VDP1 is connected to this unit, press WIDE and hold to select a desired screen mode. Pressing and holding WIDE repeatedly switches between the settings. FULL (full) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc- tion only, giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal pic- ture) without any omissions. JUST (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally to the ends, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen. CINEMA (cinema) The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as FULL or ZOOM in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between FULL and ZOOM in the vertical direction; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap- tions lie outside. ZOOM (zoom) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizonta lly; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture). NORMAL (normal) A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. Notes ! Different settings can be memorized for each video source. ! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio, it may appear different. ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public view- ing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author âÂÂs rights protected by the Copy- right Law . ! Video will appear grainy when viewed in CINEMA or ZOOM mode. Changing the picture adjustm ent Bright, contrast, color and hue Y ou can adjust BRIGHT (brightness), CONTRAST (contrast), COLOR (color) and HUE (hue) for each source and rear view cam- era. ! The adjustments of BRIGHT and CONTRAST are stored separately for light ambient (daytime) and dark ambient (night- time). ! Y ou cannot adjust HUE for P AL video. ! Y ou cannot adjust COLOR or HUE for the audio source. 1 Press V .ADJ and hold to display PICTURE ADJUST. P ress V .ADJ and hold until PICTURE ADJUST appears in the display . 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. The adjustment function names are displayed and adjustable ones are highlighted. <CRB2163-B>98 Other Functions En 98 Section 21
Black plate (99,1) ! BRIGHT â Adjust the black intensity ! CONTRAST â Adjust the contrast ! COLOR â Adjust the color saturation ! HUE â Adjust the tone of color (red is em- phasized or green is emphasized) ! BACK-CAMERA /SOURCE â Switch the pic- ture adjustment modes # Y ou can adjust the picture adjustment for rear view camera only when B. CAMERA is selected for A V INPUT 2 . (Refer to When rear view camera is connected to A V input 2 on page 88.) # If you are viewing image from the rear view camera, you cannot touch SOURCE to adjust pic- ture adjustment for the selected source. # With some rear view cameras, picture adjust- ment may not be possible. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the selected item. Each time you touch c or d it increases or de- creases the level of selected item. 24 to â 24 is displayed as the level is increa sed or de- creased. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Dimmer The adjustment of DIMMER is stored sepa- rately for each ambient light; daytime, evening and nighttime. 1 Press V .ADJ and hold to display PICTURE ADJUST. P ress V .ADJ and hold until PICTURE ADJUST appears in the display . 2 T ouch DIMMER. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the brightness. Each time you touch c or d moves the key to- wards the left or the right. The level indicates the brightness of the screen being adjusted. The farther the key moves to the right, the brighter the screen. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Note The icons indicating the current ambient bright- ness used for adjusting BRIGHT and CONTRAST may differ from DIMMER slightly . Selecting the background display Y ou can display the thumbnails of available background pictures/movies and select one to set your background display. The selection can be made each for the audio source group (playing CD, listening to T uner , using tele- phone source, etc.) and the movie source group (watching DVD, AV , etc.). 1 Press ENTERT AINMENT (ENT). Thumbnails of background pictures/movies appear on the display . # T o go to the next group of thumbnails, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of thumbnails , touch PREV. 2 T ouch one of the thumbnails that you want to display in the background. The selected picture/movie is displayed at the background. Note In the following cases, background images from that source cannot be selected: ! When each AV input setting (A V input 1 and 2) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 87). ! When the A VG-VDP1 is not connected to this unit. <CRB2163-B>99 Other Functions En 99 Section 21 Other Functions
Black plate (100,1) Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch Panel Calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response po- sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad- justment methods: 4-point adjustment, in which you touch four corners of the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen. ! Make sure to use the supplied pen for ad- justment, and gently touch the screen. If you press the touch panel forcefully , the touch panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen. Otherwise the screen is damaged. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch OFF to turn this unit off. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . 2 Press and hold BAND/ESC. The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap- pears. 3 T ouch each of the arrows on the four corners of the scr een with the touch panel adjustment pen. Arrows you touch turn red. # If the arrows are not turned red, the 4-point ad- justment cannot be complete. T ouch each arrow for adjustment and complete, or cancel the ad- justment to return to the OFF display . # T o cancel the adjustment, press V .ADJ . 4 Press BAND/ESC to complete the 4- point adjustment. The adjusted position data is saved. ! Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data. 5 Press BAND/ESC to proceed to the 16- point adjustment. The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen appears. # T o cancel the adjustment, press V .ADJ . 6 Gently touch the center of the mark displayed on the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. After you touch all the marks, the adjusted po- sition data is saved. ! Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data. 7 T o complete the adjustment, press V .ADJ. # T o restart the 16-point adjustment, press BAND/ESC . Note If touch panel adjustment cannot be per formed properly , consult your local P ioneer dealer . Displaying the A VG-VDP1 (Pioneer V ehicle Dynamics Processor) This unit can be used as the display unit for the AVG-VDP1 (sold separately) product. ! Y ou can operate this function only when a P ioneer V ehicle Dynamics P rocessor (A VG - VDP1) is connected to this unit. % Press V .ADJ to switch the display to the A VG-VDP1. # T o return to the video of sources, press V .ADJ again. <CRB2163-B>100 Other Functions En 100 Section 21
Black plate (101,1) Using the AUX source This unit can control an auxiliar y equipment such as VCR or portable device (sold sepa- rately). When connected, auxiliar y equipment is automatically read in as AUX source and as- signed to AUX . About AUX connection method Y ou have two methods to connect auxiliar y equipment to this unit. Stereo mini pin plug cable When connecting auxiliar y equipment using a stereo mini plug cable % Insert the stereo mini plug into the AUX input jack on this unit. F or more details, refer to the installation man- ual. IP-BUS-RCA interconnector When connecting auxiliar y equipment using an IP -BUS-RCA Inter connector (sold separately) % Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separetely) to connect this unit to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. F or more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Inter- connector owner âÂÂs manual. # Y ou can only make this type of connection if the auxiliary equipment has RCA outputs. Selecting AUX as the source % T ouch the source icon and then touch AUX to select AUX as the source. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. F or more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 94. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, press A.MENU button and touch FUNCTION and then touch EDIT. 2 T ouch ABC to select the desired charac- ter type. T ouch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character types: Alphabet (upper case), numbers and symbols â alphabet (lower case)â European letters, such as those with accents (e.g., á, à, ä , ç) # Y ou can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123. 3 T ouch a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. Each time you touch a it will display alphabet, numbers or symbols in ascending order ( AB C ... ). Each time you touch b it will display a letter in descending order . 4 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, touch d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . T ouch c to move backwards in the display. <CRB2163-B>101 Other Functions En 101 Section 21 Other Functions
Black plate (102,1) 5 T ouch OK to store the entered title in memory . 6 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . Setting remote control code type Changing the remote control operation switch to DVD mode enables you to operate the built- in DVD player with the supplied remote con- trol. There are three remote codes for DVD mode, code type A, code type B and code type AV H . However , when operating this unit, use the code type AV H only. ! With this unit, code A and B cannot be used. 1 Set the remote control selection switch on the left side of the re mote control to the appropriate position with a pen tip or other pointed instrument . ! If you select AV H mode, there is no need to take the following procedure. ! If you select A/ B and if in case you need to operate other Pioneer units (may be avail- able in the future), take the following proce- dure and change the code type to the appropriate type. 2 Press 0 and CLEAR on the remote con- trol simultaneously to change the code type. Initially , the code type is set to A . Each time you press 0 and CLEAR simultaneously on the remote control the code type switches be- tween A and B. Using the preprogrammed function Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using PGM. ! In order to use PGM button for prepro - grammed func tion, the remote control op- eration mode switch should be set to AV H. % Press PGM to turn pause on when se- lecting the following sources: ! DVD-V â Built-in DVD player ! M-CD â Multi-CD player ! iPod â iP od ! BT Audio â Bluetooth Audio # T o turn pause off , press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to turn BSM on when selecting TUNER as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to turn BSSM on when selecting TV as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. <CRB2163-B>102 Other Functions En 102 Section 21
Black plate (103,1) T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn âÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn âÂÂt operate. Leads and connectors are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once more that all connect ions are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install the correct fuse with the same rating. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocessor to oper- ate incorrectly. P ress RESET . (P age 11) Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty . Clean disc. (P age 107) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play . Check what type the disc is. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correc tly . Connect the cables correctly . The unit is per forming still, slow mo- tion or frame-by-frame playback . There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. There is no picture. The parking brake cord is not con- nected. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The icon is displayed, and op- eration is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compat ible with the disc âÂÂs organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has become impos- sible during playback. After pressing g once, start playback once more. There is no sound. V olume level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off. There is audio and video skip- ping. The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly. The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display . Select the appropriate setting for your display. (P age 92) When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Nothing is displayed. The touch panel keys cannot be used. The rear view camera is not con- nected. A V input 2 is at incorr ect setting. Connect a rear view camera. P ress V .ADJ to return to the source display and then select the correct settin g for AV input 2 . (P age 88) <CRB2163-B>103 Additional Information En 103 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (104,1) Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. ( P age 8, P age 115) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental lock off or change the level. (P age 92) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorr ect. Input the correct code number . (Page 92) Y ou have forgotten your code num- ber . P ress CLEAR 10 times to cancel the code number . (P age 93) Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings . Y ou cannot switch among multiple languages if they are not reco rded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language settings selected in DVD SETUP . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the langua ge selected in DVD SETUP . Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in DVD SETUP is not recorded on the disc. Switching the viewing angle is not possible. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cannot switch between multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes reco rded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angle s when watch- ing scenes recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremely uncle ar/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibitin g copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizontal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs featuring PBC. <CRB2163-B>104 Additional Information En 104 Appendix
Black plate (105,1) Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to record the error message. Message Cause Action (See) ERROR-02 Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly. ERROR-05 Electrical or mechanical P ress RESET . ERROR-A0 Electrical or mechanical Consult your dealer or your nearest author- ized Pioneer Service Station. DIFFERENT REGION DISC The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . NON PLA Y ABLE DISC This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play. TEMPERA TURE PROT ECTION IN MOTION The temperature of this unit is out- side the normal operating range W ait until the unit âÂÂs temperature returns to within normal operating limits. PROTECT All the files on the inserted disc are secured by digital rights manage- ment (DRM) Replace disc. TRACK SKIPPED The inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by digital rights management (DRM) Replace disc. Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto T A and EQ, an error message may appear on the display . If an error message appears, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. Af ter checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action Error check MIC Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. Error check front SP , Error check FL SP , Error check FR SP , Error check center SP , Error check RL SP , Error check RR SP , Error check subwoofer The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly . ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. ! Set the microphone correctly. <CRB2163-B>105 Additional Information En 105 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (106,1) Message Cause Action Error check noise The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible, and switch off the engine, air condi- tioner or heater . ! Set the microphone correctly. <CRB2163-B>106 Additional Information En 106 Appendix
Black plate (107,1) DVD player and care ! Use only normal, round discs. If you insert irregular , non-round, shaped discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play prop- erly . ! Check all discs for cracks, scratches or warping before playing. Discs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed) sur face when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center . ! If the heater is used in cold weather , con- densation may form on components inside the DVD player . Condensation may cause the DVD player to not operate properly . If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to allow it to dr y out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. ! The DVD player plays one, standard 12-cm disc at a time. Playing back an 8-cm disc is not possible with this unit. Playable disc and adapter are listed in the table below . 12-cm disc 8-cm disc 8-cm disc adapter àâÂÂâ DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode). It is not possible to play back DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). ! It may not be possible to play back DVD -R/ DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode), be- cause of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation , etc. on the lens of this unit. ! It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. <CRB2163-B>107 Additional Information En 107 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (108,1) ! It may not be possible to play back CD -R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto- rage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! This unit conforms to the track skip func- tion of the CD -R/CD-RW disc. The tracks containing the track skip information are skipped autom atically (in case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! If you insert a CD -RW disc into this unit, time to playback will be longer than when you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. Dual Discs ! Dual Discs are two -sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other . ! Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. However , since the CD side of Dual Discs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit. ! F requent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc. Serious scratches can lead to playback pro- blems on this unit. In some cases, a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject. T o prevent this, we recommend you refrain from using Dual Disc with this unit. ! Please refer to the information from the disc manufacturer for more detailed infor- mation about Dual Discs. MP3 and WMA files ! MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! WMA is short for Windows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression tech- nology that is developed by Microsoft Cor- poration. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . ! This unit may not operate correctly depend- ing on the application used to encode WMA files. ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! This unit allows playback of MP3/WMA files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Disc recordings compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system can be played back. ! It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. ! MP3/WMA files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3 or .wma), is 64, from the first character . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 64. <CRB2163-B>108 Additional Information En 108 Appendix
Black plate (109,1) ! In case of files recorded according to the Romeo file system, only the first 64 charac- ters can be displayed. ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD -EXTRA and MIXED -MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD-DA. ! The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing software. F or this reason, the expected sequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However , there also is some writing software which per- mits setting of the playback order . ! Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge into one another without a pause. When these discs are converted to MP3/WMA files and burned to a CD-R/CD -RW/CD- ROM, the files will be played back on this player with a short pause between each one, regardless of the length of the pause between tracks on the original audio CD. Important ! When naming an MP3 or a WMA file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3 or .wma). ! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.mp3 or .wma) as an MP3 or a WMA file. T o prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than MP3 or WMA files. MP3 additional information ! Files are compatible with the ID3 T ag V er . 1.0, 1.1, 2.2 and 2.3 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title), artist (track artist) and comments. Ver . 2.x of ID3 T ag is given priority when both V er . 1.x and V er . 2.x exist. ! The emphasis function is valid only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequen- cies are played back. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility . ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO formats. ! The sound quality of MP3 files generally be- comes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality , we recommend using only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps. WMA additional information ! This unit plays back WMA files encoded by Windows Media Player version 7 and 8. ! Y ou can only play back WMA files in the fre- quencies 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. ! The sound quality of WMA files generally becomes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 48 kbps to 192 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality , we recommend using discs recorded with a higher bit rate. ! This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). <CRB2163-B>109 Additional Information En 109 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (1 10,1) About folders and MP3/ WMA files ! An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3/WMA files on it is shown below . Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently se- lected. 3 1 2 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user cannot assign folder numbers. ! It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number .) ! MP3/WMA files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However , there is a delay in the start of playback on discs with numerous tiers. F or this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play back up to 253 items from folders on one disc. Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside this unit, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Do not use the unit in this condition because doing so may result in a fire, electric shock, or other failure. ! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell, or any other abnormal signs from the display , turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Using this unit in this condition may result in permanent da- mage to the system. ! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as there are high-vo ltage compone nts inside which may cause an electric shock. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest author- ized PIONEER Ser vice Station for internal in- spection, adjustments or repairs. Handling the display ! When the display is subjected to direct sun- light for a long period of time, it will be- come ver y hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. When not using this unit, close the display and avoid exposing it to direct sunlight. ! The display should be used within the tem- perature ranges shown below . <CRB2163-B>110 Additional Information En 110 Appendix
Black plate (1 11,1) Storage temperature range: âÂÂ20 ðC to 80 ðC At temperatures higher or lower than the operating temperature range the display may not operate normally. ! The LCD screen of this unit is exposed in order to increase its visibility within the ve- hicle. Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it. ! Do not place anything on the display when it is opened. Also, do not attempt to carr y out angle adjustment, or open/close the display by hand. Applying strong force to the display may damage it. ! Do not push the LCD screen with much force as this may scratch it. ! Be careful not to place anything between the display and the main body when the display is opening or closing. If an object gets between the display and main body , the display may stop working. ! Be careful of fingers, long hair , and loose articles of clothing which could possibly get caught between the display and the main body and cause serious injur y . Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! If the display is near the vent of an air con- ditioner when it is opened, make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from the heater may damage the LCD screen, and cool air from the cool- er may cause moisture to form inside the display resulting in possible damage. Also, if the display is cooled down by the cooler , the screen may become dark, or the life span of the small fluorescent tube used in- side the display may be shortened. ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a problem with the display. ! At low temperatures, the LCD screen may be dark for a while after the power is turned on. ! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight. ! When using a portable phone, keep the an- tenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. Keeping the display in good condition ! When wiping the screen, take care not to scratch the sur face. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. Small fluorescent tube ! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the display to illuminate the LCD screen. â The fluorescent tube should last for ap- proximately 10 000 hours, depending on operating conditions. (Using the display at low temperatures reduces the ser vice life of the fluorescent tube.) â When the fluorescent tube reaches the end of its useful life, the screen will be dark and the image will no longer be projected. If this happens, consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station. <CRB2163-B>111 Additional Information En 111 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (1 12,1) Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 P ashto, P usht o (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortugues e (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te) , 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 T onga (to), 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongoli an (mn ), 1314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 V olapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no), 1415 W olof (wo) , 2315 F aroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy ), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612 <CRB2163-B>112 Additional Information En 112 Appendix
Black plate (1 13,1) T erms Aspect ratio This is the width-to -height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps (bits per second) units. The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con- nectivity technology that is developed as a cable replacement for mobile phones, hand- held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper- ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per second. Bluetooth was launched by a special interest group (SIG) that comprises of Ericsson Inc., Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., T oshiba and IBM in 1998, and it is currently developed by nearly 2 000 companies worldwide. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist âÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the num- ber of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for- mat logic of CD -ROM folders and files. F or the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the â _â sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters). <CRB2163-B>113 Additional Information En 113 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (1 14,1) Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark âÂÂ. â and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally , DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality . m3u Playlists created using the â WINAMP â sof t- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Orga nization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving P ictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session . Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions on one disc. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Optical digital output/input By transmitting and receiving audio signals in a digital signal format, the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of transmis- sion is minimized. An optical digital output/ input is designed to transmit and receive digi- tal signals optically . Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD -R , etc., at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult-or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit âÂÂs parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. <CRB2163-B>114 Additional Information En 114 Appendix
Black plate (1 15,1) Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . This unit âÂÂs region number is displayed on the bottom of the unit. Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres- sion, it is possible to achieve compression- priority sound quality. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression technol- ogy that is developed by Microsoft Corpora- tion. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. <CRB2163-B>115 Additional Information En 115 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (1 16,1) Specifications General Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC (allowable voltage range: 12.0 V to 14.4 V DC) Grounding system ................... Negative type Max. current consumption ..................................................... 10.0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ............................... 1 7 8 à10 0 à1 6 6 m m Nose ..................................... 1 7 1 à96 à1 6 mm W eight .......................................... 3 . 0 k g Display Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 7 . 0 inch wide/16:9 (effective display area: 156 à82 mm) P ixels ............................................. 336,960 (1,440 à234) T y p e ................................................ T F T acti ve matrix, transmis- sive type Color system .............................. NTSC/PAL/P AL-M/SECAM compatible Storage temperature range ..................................................... â 20 ðC to 80 ðC Angle adjustment .................... 0 ð t o 2 1 ð (initial settings: 0ð) Audio Continuous power output is 22 W per channel minimum into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15 000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à4 50 W à2/4 W 70 W à1/2 W (for subwoofer) Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W allowable) P reout max output level/output impedance ..................................................... 4 . 0 V/100 W Equalizer (3-Band P aram etric Equalizer): Low F requency ................ 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ 1 2 d B Mid F requency ................ 200/500/1k/2k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ 1 2 d B High F requency ................ 3.15k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ 1 2 d B Loudness contour: L o w ....................................... 3.5 dB (100 Hz), 3 dB (10 kHz) M i d ....................................... 1 0 d B (100 Hz), 6.5 dB (10 kHz) High ..................................... 1 1 dB (100 Hz), 11 dB (10 kHz) (volume: âÂÂ30 dB) HPF : F requency .......................... 50/80/125 Hz Slope .................................... âÂÂ12 dB/oct Subwoofer: F requency .......................... 50/80/125 Hz Slope .................................... âÂÂ18 dB/oct Gain ...................................... ñ 1 2 d B Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse DVD Player System .......................................... D V D video, Video CD, Com- pact disc audio system Usable discs .............................. D V D video, Video CD, Com- pact disc Region number: for Southeast Asian models ........................................... 3 for South American and Oceani an models ........................................... 4 for Middle East Asian and South African models ........................................... 2 Signal format: Sampling frequency ..... 44.1/48/96 kHz Number of quantization bits ........................................... 16/20/24; linear F requency respo nse ............... 5 H z t o 4 4 0 0 0 H z (with DVD, at sampling frequency 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 9 7 d B (1 kHz) (IEC -A net- work) (CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC -A network)) Dynamic range ......................... 9 5 d B (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB (1 kHz)) Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz ) Output level: Video .................................... 1 . 0 Vp-p/75 W (ñ0.2 V) Number of channels .............. 2 (s t ereo) MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 <CRB2163-B>116 Additional Information En 116 Appendix
Black plate (1 17,1) WMA decoding format ......... Ve r . 7 & 8 FM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 d B f (0.7 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ..... 1 0 d B f (0.9 õV/75 W , mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 7 5 d B (IEC -A network) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 3 % ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf , 1 kHz, mono) F requency respo nse ............... 3 0 H z to 15 0 0 0 Hz (ñ 3 d B ) Stereo separation .................... 4 5 d B ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz) AM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 5 3 1 kH z t o 1 6 0 2 kH z ( 9 kHz) 530 kHz to 1 640 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity ..................... 1 8 õV (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 5 d B (IEC -A network) Infrared remote control W avelength ................................. 9 4 5 n m Output ........................................... typ; 10 mw/sr per Infrared LED Note Specifications and the design are subject to pos- sible modifications without notice due to im- provements. <CRB2163-B>117 Additional Information En 117 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (1 18,1) A Angle icon ................................................. .31, .91 Aspect ratio ............................................ .92, .113 Audio language ........................................ .30, .91 B Bookmark ........................................................ .29 Brightness ....................................................... .98 C Chapter .......................................................... .113 Code number .................................................. . 92 Color ................................................................ .98 Contrast ........................................................... .98 D Direct search .................................................. .30 Dolby Digital .......................... ....................... .113 DTS ................................................................ .113 H Hue .................................................................. .98 L Language code chart .................................. .112 Linear PCM (LPCM) ..................................... .114 M Menu language .............................................. .91 MPEG .......................................................... ... .114 Multi-angle ............................. ................. .31, .114 Multi-audio .............................................. .30, .114 Multi-subtitle .......................... ................. .31, .114 O Optical digital output/input ........................ .114 P P arental lock ........................................... .92, .114 PBC (playback control) ................................. .34 Playback control (PBC) ............................... .115 R Region number ........................................ . 8, .115 S Subtitle language ..................................... .31, .90 T Title ............................................................. ... .115 TV aspect ......................................................... .92 V Video CD ........................................................... .8 W Wide screen mode ......................................... .98 <CRB2163-B>118 Index En 118
Black plate (1 19,1) <CRB2163-B>119 En 119
Black plate (120,1) PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU , TOKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-91 20 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-755 5 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkwa y , Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-2 83-5901 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico , D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-427 0 å  é è¡ 份 æ éÂÂå ¬ å¸ 總 å ¬ å¸ : å°å 帠丠山å 路 亠段 44 èÂÂ13 樠é» 話 : (02) 2521-3588 å  é é» å ＠馠港＠æÂÂéÂÂå ¬ å¸ 馠港 ä¹ é¾ å° æ² å 海港 å 丠ç å æ¥Â丠忠9 æ¨Â901-6 室 é» 話 : (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Corporat ion. Copyright é 2006 by Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. Printed in Japan <CRB2163-B> RC,RD ,RI <KNNZF> <06D00000> <CRB2163-B>120
Black plate (2,1) Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please rea d through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished read ing the instr uctions, keep this ma n- ual in a safe place for future r eference. Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 8 ! DVD video disc region numbers 8 ! When an operation is prohibited 11 Precautions IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS 6 T o ensure safe driving 6 T o avoid batter y exhaustion 7 Before Y ou Start About this unit 8 About this manual 9 In case of trouble 9 F eatures 9 About WMA 10 T o protect the LCD screen 10 F or viewing LCD comfortably 11 What the marks on DVDs indicate 11 Resetting the microprocessor 11 About the demo mode 12 Use and care of the remote control 12 Customising your system Connecting with separately sold Pioneer products 13 Using multi-channel processor 13 Using iP od 13 Using the AVG- VDP1 (P ioneer Vehicle Dynamics Processor) 13 Using the rear display 13 Using Bluetooth wireless technology 14 What âÂÂs What Head unit 15 Remote control 16 Basic Operations T urning the unit on and selecting a source 19 Loading/Ejecting discs 20 Adjusting the flap angle 21 Adjusting the volume 21 T urning the unit off 21 T ouch panel key basic operation 22 T uner Listening to the radio 24 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 25 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 25 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 25 T uning in strong signals 26 Playing DVD video discs W atching a DVD video 27 Operating the DVD menu 28 Skipping back or forward to another title 28 Stopping playback 28 P ausing DVD video playback 28 Resume playback (Bookmark) 29 F rame-by-fram e playback 29 Slow motion playback 29 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specifie d time 30 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 30 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 31 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 31 Return to the specified scene 32 Automatic playback of DVDs 32 <CRB2163-B>2 Contents En 2
Black plate (3,1) Introduction of advanced DVD video operation 32 Repeating play 32 Selecting audio output 33 Playing Video CDs W atching a Video CD 34 Stopping playback 35 P ausing Video CD playback 35 F rame-by-fram e playback 35 Slow motion playback 35 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specifie d time 36 PBC playback 36 Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 37 Repeating play 37 Selecting audio output 37 Playing CDs Listening to a CD 38 Stopping playback 39 P ausing CD playback 39 Using CD TEXT functions 39 Introduction of advanced CD operation 40 Repeating play 40 Playing tracks in random order 40 Scanning tracks of a CD 40 Playing MP3/WMA Listening to MP3/WMA 41 Stopping playback 42 P ausing MP3/WMA playback 42 Displaying information on MP3/WMA file 43 Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (MP3/WMA) operation 44 Repeating play 44 Playing tracks in random order 44 Scanning folders and tracks 45 Multi-CD Player Listening to a CD 46 P ausing CD playback 47 Using CD TEXT functions 47 50-disc multi-CD player 47 Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 48 Repeating play 48 Playing tracks in random order 48 Scanning CDs and tracks 49 Using ITS playlists 49 Using compression and bass emphasis 50 TV tuner W atching the television 51 Storing and recalling broadcast stations 52 Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 52 Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 53 Selecting the area group 53 Playing songs on iPod Listening to songs on your iP od 54 Browsing for a song 54 P ausing a song 55 Displaying text information on iPod 55 Displaying information on song 55 Repeating play 55 Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) 56 Bluetooth Audio Listening to songs on BT Audio (Bluetooth audio player) 57 Connecting a Bluetoo th audio player 58 Playing songs on Bluetooth audio player 58 <CRB2163-B>3 En 3 Contents
Black plate (4,1) Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player 59 Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 59 Bluetooth T elephone Hands-free phoning with cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology 60 Setting up for hands-free phoning 61 Basic operation of hands-free phoning 61 Introduction of advanced hands-free phoning operation 62 Connecting a cellular phone 62 Disconnecting a cellular phone 63 Registering connected cellular phone 63 Deleting a registered phone 64 Connecting to a registe red cellular phone 64 Using the Phone Book 64 Using the Call Histor y 66 Using preset numbers 67 Making a call by entering phone number 68 Clearing memory 68 Setting the automat ic answering 68 Setting the automat ic rejecting 68 Switching the ring tone 68 Echo canceling and noise reduction 69 Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 69 Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 70 Using balance adjustment 70 Using the equalizer 71 Adjusting loudness 72 Using subwoofer output 72 Using nonfading output 72 Using the high pass filter 73 Adjusting source levels 73 Staging for car environment 73 Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustments 75 Using the position selector 75 Using balance adjustment 76 Adjusting source levels 76 Using the dynamic range control 77 Using the down-mix function 77 Using the direct control 77 Using the Dolby P ro Logic II 77 Setting the speaker setting 78 Adjusting the speaker output levels 79 Selecting a cross-over frequency 80 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 80 Using the time alignment 81 Using the equalizer 82 Using the auto-equalizer 84 Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) 84 Setup Introduction of setup adjustments 87 Setting the A V input 87 Setting the clock 88 Selecting video on rear display 89 DVD Setup Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 90 Setting the subtitle language 90 Setting the audio language 91 Setting the menu language 91 Switching the assist subtitle on or off 91 Setting the angle icon display 91 Setting the aspect ratio 92 Setting the parental lock 92 <CRB2163-B>4 Contents En 4
Black plate (5,1) Initial Setup Adjusting initial settings 94 Switching the auxiliary setting 94 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 94 Setting the FM tuning step 95 Setting the AM tuning step 95 Changing languages for CAUTION 95 Switching the sound muting/attenuation 95 Mixing AVG-VDP1 beep and audio sound 96 Correcting distorted sound 96 Setting the TV signal 96 Resetting the audio functions 97 Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection 97 Extending the vehicle â s antenna 97 Other F unctions Adjusting the screen 98 Selecting the background display 99 Adjusting the respons e positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) 100 Displaying the AVG-VDP1 (P ioneer Vehicle Dynamics Processor) 100 Using the AUX source 101 Setting remote control code type 102 Using the preprogrammed function 102 Additional Information T roubleshooting 103 Error messages 105 Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages 105 DVD player and care 107 DVD discs 107 CD-R/CD-RW discs 107 Dual Discs 108 MP3 and WMA files 108 About folders and MP3/WMA files 110 Using the display correctly 110 Language code chart for DVD 112 T erms 113 Specifications 116 Index 118 <CRB2163-B>5 En 5 Contents
Black plate (6,1) IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future refer- ence. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully be- fore operating your display . 2 Keep this manual handy as a re ference for operating procedures and safety informa- tion. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care- fully . 4 Do not allow other persons to use this sys- tem until they have read and understood the operating instructions. 5 Do not install the display where it may (i) obstruct the driver âÂÂs vision, (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle âÂÂs oper- ating systems or safety features, includ- ing air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver âÂÂs ability to safely oper- ate the vehicle. 6 Do not operate this display if doing so in any way will divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. Always observe safe driving rules and follow all existing traffic regulations. If you experi- ence difficulty in operating the system or reading the display , park your vehicle in a safe location and mak e necessary adjust- ments. 7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. 8 Never use headphones while driving. 9 T o promote safety , certain functions are disabled unless the parking brake is on, and the vehicle is not in motion. 10 Never set the volume of your display so high that you cannot hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. WARNING ! Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself. Installation or servi- cing of the display by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be danger ous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards. T o ensur e safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWITCH . IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. ! T o avoid the risk of damage and injur y and the potential violation of applicable laws, this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver . ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. Also, rear displays should not be in a location where it is a visible distraction to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed and this unit â s DVD features should not be used. <CRB2163-B>6 Precautions En 6 Section 01
Black plate (7,1) When you attempt to watch a DVD, Video CD or TV while driving, the warning VIDEO VIEW- ING IS NOT A V AILABLE WHILE DRIVING will appear on the front display . T o watch a DVD, Video CD or TV on the front display , park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. T o avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this unit. Using this unit without running the engine can result in battery drainage. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. <CRB2163-B>7 Precautions En 7 Section 01 Precautions
Black plate (8,1) About this unit CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, this unit damage, smoke, and overheat could result from contact with liquids. ! â CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCTâ This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain ac- cess to the inside of the product. Refer all ser- vicing to qualified personne l. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op- erating procedures and precautions. ! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! P rotect this unit from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! If this unit does not operate properly , contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Ser- vice Station. Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD video Video CD CD Notes ! is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Li- censing Corporation. ! This player can only play back discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc region numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit. The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. <CRB2163-B>8 Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
Black plate (9,1) About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit âÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. In case of trouble Should this product fail to operate properly , contact your dealer or nearest authorized P io- neer Ser vice Station. Features T ouch panel key operation It is possible to operate this unit by using touch panel key . DVD video playback It is possible to play back DVD video and DVD- R/RW (video mode). Remember that use of this system for com- mercial or public viewing purposes may con- stitute an infringement on the author âÂÂs rights protected by the Copyright Law . Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). CD playback Music CD/CD -R/RW playback is possible. MP3 file playback Y ou can play back MP3 files recorded on CD- ROM/CD-R/CD -RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). ! Supply of this product only conveys a li- cense for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broad- casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other net- works or in other electronic content distri- bution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An inde- pendent license for such use is required. F or details, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. WMA file playback Y ou can play back WMA files recorded on CD- ROM/CD-R/CD -RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). NTSC, P AL, P AL-M (for South America) and SECAM (for Russian) compatibility This unit is NTSC/P AL/P AL-M/SECAM system compatible. When connecting other compo- nents to this unit, be sure components are compatible with the same video system other - wise images will not be correctly reproduced. Multi-aspect Switching between wide screen, letterbox and panscan display is possible. Multi-audio Y ou can switch between multiple audio sys- tems recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-subtitle Y ou can switch between multiple subtitle lan- guages recorded on a DVD as desired. <CRB2163-B>9 Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Black plate (10,1) Multi-angle Y ou can switch between multiple viewing an- gles of a scene recorded on a DVD as desired. Hands-free phoning Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100), this unit realizes effortless hands-free phoning with Bluetooth wireless technology. Bluetooth audio player compatibility Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100), you can control Bluetooth audio player featur- ing Bluetooth wireless technology. iPod î compatibility When you use this unit with a P ioneer iP od adapter (CD -IB100 B) (sold separately), you can control an iP od with Dock Connector . ! iP od is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovisio n Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. About WMA The Windows Media ⢠logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Notes ! This unit may not operate correctly depending on the application used to encode WMA files. ! Depending on the version of Wi ndows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. T o protect the LCD screen ! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the display when this unit is not being used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures. ! When using a cellular phone, keep the an- tenna of the cellular phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. ! Never touch the screen with anything be- sides your finger when operating the touch panel function. The screen can scratch easily . <CRB2163-B>10 Before Y ou Start En 10 Section 02
Black plate (1 1,1) For viewing LCD comfortably Due to its construction, the viewing angle of the LCD screen is limited. Y ou can adjust it by changing either screen size or picture adjust- ment. Changing the wide screen size By changing the screen size from 4:3 to 16:9, you can adjust the screen so that the screen can fit to the video image you are playing. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the wide scr een mode on page 98. Changing the picture adjustm ent Y ou can make the best adjustment to the pic- ture display by changing BRIGHT , CONTRAST, COLOR and HUE . Y ou can also dim or enlight the overall picture image using DIMMER. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the picture adjustment on page 98. What the marks on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the number of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the number of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the number of viewing an- gles. Mark Meaning 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to -height ratio) type. 2 3 4 ALL Indicates the number of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be performed because of the programming on the disc. When this happens, the icon appears on the screen. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. Resetting the microprocessor P ressing RESET lets you reset the micropro - cessor to its initial settings. The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: ! P rior to using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly ! When strange or incorrect messages ap- pear on the display 1 T ur n the ignition switch OFF . 2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. RESET button <CRB2163-B>11 Before Y ou Start En 11 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Black plate (12,1) Notes ! When using with AVG-VDP1, if you press RESET , be sure ACC OFF is selected. If ACC ON is selected, correct operation may not be possible even if you press RESET. ! After completing connections or when you want to erase all memorized settings or return the unit to its initial (factor y) settings, switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET. About the demo mode Important The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be con- nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations. If this is not done, the vehicle batter y may be drained. The feature demo automatically starts when you select the source OFF . The demo con- tinues while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. T o cancel the feature demo, press and hold ENTERT AINMENT (ENT) . T o restart the feature demo, press and hold ENTERT AINMENT (ENT) again. Remember that if the feature demo continues operating when the car engine is turned off , it may drain batter y power . Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( âÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper di- rection. ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray . WARNING Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor . CAUTION ! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium batter y . ! Remove the batter y if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the batter y in fire. ! Do not handle the battery with metallic tools. ! Do not store the batter y with metallic materi- als. ! In the event of batter y leakage, wipe the re- mote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or en- vironmental public institutions â rules that apply in your countr y/area. Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. ! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. <CRB2163-B>12 Before Y ou Start En 12 Section 02
Black plate (13,1) Connecting with separately sold Pioneer products Connecting with other P ioneer products, you can cr eate the best audio -visual environment for enjoying music and movie in car . This sec- tion describes available options that can be con- trolled by this unit. Using multi-channel processor When using this unit with a P ioneer multi- channel processor , you can enjoy the atmo - sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5.1 channel re- cordings. F or details concerning operation, refer to Intr o- duction of DSP adjustments on page 75. ! Manufactured under license from Dolby La- boratories. âÂÂDolby âÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logic âÂÂ, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ! â DTSâ and â DTS Digital Surroundâ are regis- tered trademarks of Digital Theater Sys- tems, Inc. Using iPod When you use this unit with a P ioneer iP od adapter (CD -IB100 B) (sold separately), you can control an iP od with Dock Connector . F or details concerning operation, refer to Play- ing songs on iP od on page 54. ! iP od is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. ! iP od adapter supports only an iP od with Dock Connector . Using the A VG-VDP1 (Pioneer V ehicle Dynamics Processor) This unit can be used as the display unit for the AVG-VDP1 (sold separately) product. F or details concerning operation, refer to Dis- playing the AVG-VDP1 (P ioneer V ehicle Dy- namics P r ocessor) on page 100. Using the rear display Combining this unit with a rear display (sold separately), you can display the selected source on the rear display so passengers in rear seats can comfortably view the same image with the front or they can watch the dif- ferent image (i.e. image from AVG- VDP1) inde- pendently . F or details concerning operation, refer to Se- lecting video on r ear display on page 89. ! When a P ioneer V ehicle Dynamics P roces- sor (AVG-VDP1) is connected to this unit, the AVG-VDP1 can be displayed on the rear display . (Refer to page 89.) Important NEVER install the rear display in a location that enables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while driving. <CRB2163-B>13 Customising your system En 13 Section 03 Customising your system
Black plate (14,1) Using Bluetooth wireless technology Playing a Bluetooth audio player using with Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100) If you connect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD - BTB100) to this unit, you can control Blue- tooth audio player via Bluetooth wireless tech- nology . F or details concerning operation, refer to Blue- tooth Audio on page 57. ! Even though your audio player does not contain a Bluetooth wireless technology module, you can still control it using a Bluetooth adapter sold on the market. ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the market. Hands-free phoning using with Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100) If you use Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100), you can connect a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology to this unit for hands-free, wireless calls, even while driving. F or details concerning hands-free phoning op- eration, refer to Hands-free phoning with cellu- lar phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology on page 60. ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the market. <CRB2163-B>14 Customising your system En 14 Section 03
Black plate (15,1) Head unit 1 BAND/ESC button P ress to select among three FM bands and one AM band and to cancel the control mode of functions. 2 RESET button P ress to return to the factor y settings (initial settings). 3 Signal receptor Receives signals from a remote control. 4 c /d buttons P ress to do manual seek tuning, fast for- ward, reverse and track search controls. 5 VOLUME P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 6 SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. 7 ENTERT AINMENT (ENT) button P ress to display the entertainment menu. 8 WIDE button P ress to select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. 9 V .ADJ button P ress and hold to display the picture adjust- ment menu. a OPEN button P ress to slide down or up the LCD panel. <CRB2163-B>15 What â s Wha t En 15 Section 04 What â s What
Black plate (16,1) Remote control Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 1 Remote control selection switch Switch to change the setting of the remote control. For details, refer to Setting re mote con- trol code type on page 102. 2 SOURCE button P ress to cycle through all the available sources. Press and hold to turn the source off . 3A T T button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the ori- ginal volume level. 4 VOLUME but- tons P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 5 AUDIO button P ress to change the audio langua ge during DVD playback. SUB TITLE but- ton P ress to change the subtitle langua ge during DVD playback. ANGLE button P ress to change the viewing angle during DVD playback. 6 RETURN button P ress to display the PBC (playback control) menu during PBC playback . a 2 3 k l j f g h 4 d e c b 8 6 5 7 i 1 9 <CRB2163-B>16 What â s Wha t En 16 Section 04
Black plate (17,1) Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 7 a /b button ( DISC) P ress to select the next/previou s disc. 8 Remote control operation mode switch Switch the operation mode between AV H, DVD and TV modes. Normall y, set to AV H .F o r details, refer to Using the re mote control operation mode switch on the next page. 9 BOOKMARK button/ PGM button P ress to operate the preprogram med functions for each source. (Refer to Using the pr epro- grammed function on page 102.) P ress to turn the bookmark functio n on or off . F or details, refer to Resume play- back (Bookmark) on page 29. 10 DIRECT button Not used. 11 REAR .S button Not used. 12 DISPLA Y but- ton P ress to select different displays. Not used. 13 ENTERT AIN- MENT (ENT) button P ress to display the entertainm ent menu. Not used. 14 1 âÂÂ12 buttons, CLEAR button P ress 0 âÂÂ9 to input numbers. Buttons 1 âÂÂ6 can op- erate the preset tuning for the tuner or disc changing for DVD player or multi- CD player . P ress CLEAR to clear the input numbe rs. P ress to select a menu on the DVD top menu. 15 BACK button P ress to return to the previous display . Not used. 16 BAND/ESC but- ton P ress to select among three FM bands and one AM band and to cancel the cont rol mode of functions. P ress to switch mode between MP3/WMA and audio data (CD-DA ) when playing discs with MP3/WMA and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD - EXTRA and MIXED-MOD E CDs. P ress to switch mode between MP3/ WMA and audio data (CD -DA) when playing discs with MP3/WMA and audio data (CD-DA ) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs. 17 PLA Y/P AUSE ( f) button P ress to switch sequentially betwee n playback and pause. REVERSE ( m) button P ress to per form fast reverse. FORW ARD ( n) button P ress to per form fast for ward. PREVIOUS ( o) button P ress to return to the previous track (chapter). NEXT ( p) button P ress to go to the next track (chapter). STEP ( r/ q) button P ress to move ahead one frame at a time during DVD/VideoCD playback. Press and hold for one second to activate slow playback. STOP ( g) but- ton P ress to stop playback. <CRB2163-B>17 What â s Wha t En 17 Section 04 What â s What
Black plate (18,1) Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 18 AUTO PLA Y button P ress to turn the DVD auto -playback function on or off. 19 a /b button ( FOLDER) P ress to select the next/previou s folder . 20 Joystick Move to do fast forward, reverse and track search controls. Click to recall MENU. Move to select a menu on the DVD menu. 21 MENU button P ress to display the DVD menu during DVD playback. TOP MENU (TOP .M) button P ress to return to the top menu durin g DVD playback. Using the remote control operation mode switch There are three remote control operation modes on the remote control. AV H mode operation When operating this unit by remote control, the mode is normally switched to AVH . ! The joystick on the remote control can per- form the same operations as the one on the head unit. Furthermore, the joystick can per form the same operations as the touch panel keys a, b, c and d. ! 1 âÂÂ6 can perform the same operations as the preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 and the disc selection keys 01 âÂÂ06 . â If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12 by using buttons 1 âÂÂ6 , press and hold the corresponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number ap- pears in the display. DVD mode operation If you switch the mode to DVD , the joystick and 1 âÂÂ12 operations are changed for DVD player . % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions, switch the mode to DVD: ! When operating the DVD menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 28.) ! When operating the PBC menu by using 1 âÂÂ12 . (Refer to Watching a V ideo CD on page 34.) ! When specifying title by using 1 âÂÂ12 . (Refer to Specifying title on page 30.) TV mode operation TV operations available with a Pioneer TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P5750TV(P)) can be controled with AV H mode. TV mode is not used with this unit. ! F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manuals. <CRB2163-B>18 What â s Wha t En 18 Section 04
Black plate (19,1) T urning the unit on and selecting a source 1 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. Y ou can select a source you want to listen to. T o switch to the DVD player , load a disc in the unit to switch to DVD-V . % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. The source names are displayed and select- able ones are highlighted. ! DISC 1 â Built-in DVD player disc 1 ! DISC 2 â Built-in DVD player disc 2 ! DISC 3 â Built-in DVD player disc 3 ! DISC 4 â Built-in DVD player disc 4 ! DISC 5 â Built-in DVD player disc 5 ! DISC 6 â Built-in DVD player disc 6 ! TUNER â T uner ! TV â T elevision ! iPod â iP od ! AUX1 â AUX 1 ! AUX2 â AUX 2 ! AV 1 â AV 1 input ! AV 2 â AV 2 input ! TEL â BT telephone ! BT Audio â Bluetooth audio player ! EXT1 â External unit 1 ! EXT2 â External unit 2 ! M-CD â Multi-CD player ! OFF â T urn the unit off ! ESC â Close source select menu # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . % When using the buttons, press SOURCE to select a source. P ress SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER (tuner) âÂÂTV (television) â AV 1 (AV 1) â AV 2 (AV 2)â DVD-V (built-in DVD player) â M-CD (multi- CD player) âÂÂiPod (iPod) â EXT1 (external unit 1) â EXT2 (external unit 2) â AUX1 (AUX 1) âÂÂAUX2 (AUX 2) âÂÂTEL (blue- tooth telephone) â BT Audio (bluetooth audio player) Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: â When there is no unit corresponding to the selected source connected to this unit. â When there is no disc in the unit. â When there is no magazine in the multi- CD player . â When the AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 94). â When the AV (AV input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 87). ! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enable s control of basic functions by this unit. T wo external units can be controlled by this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit. ! When this unit â s blue/white lead is connect ed to the vehicle âÂÂs auto-antenna relay control terminal, the vehicle âÂÂs antenna extends when this unit âÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the antenna, turn the source off . <CRB2163-B>19 Basic Operation s En 19 Section 05 Basic Operations
Black plate (20,1) Loading/Ejecting discs CAUTION Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel. Be especially cautious of children âÂÂs hands and fin- gers. Loading a disc Up to six discs can be stored into this unit. Each disc is stored in each disc holder allow- ing you to specif y a holder for loading a disc. 1 Press OPEN on the unit to display load- ing/ejecting menu. The LCD panel opens halfway , and the load- ing/ejecting menu is displayed on the screen. ! If the disc in the holder has already been played, the disc type is displayed on the holder icon (e.g. CD, DVD etc.). ! NO DISC is displayed for an empty holder . 2 T ouch LOAD next to the holder you want to insert a disc in. The selected holder flashes. When READY is displayed, this unit becomes on standby to load a disc into the holder . # If the holder has already loaded a disc, you need to eject the disc first. F or details concerning about ejecting a disc, refer to Ejecting a disc on the next page. 3 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. The disc is loaded into the selected holder . Repeat these steps until you have done load- ing discs into this unit. # T o cancel loading the disc into the selected holder , touch CANCEL. 4 T o replace the LCD panel to the original position, pre ss OPEN on the unit. # When the automatic playback function is on , this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automati- cally start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 32. Notes ! The DVD player plays one, standard 12-cm disc at a time. Playing back an 8-cm disc is not possible with this unit. Playable disc and adapter are listed in the table below . 12-cm disc 8-cm disc 8-cm disc adapter àâÂÂâ ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 8. ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play , check that the label side of the disc is up. P ress OPEN and touch h to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before insert- ing it again. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to Error messages on page 105. ! If bookmark function is on , DVD playback re- sumes from the selected point. For more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 29. ! This unit does not automatically change discs even if it reaches to the end of the currently playing disc. T o change discs, press a or b button (DISC) on the remote control. <CRB2163-B>20 Basic Operation s En 20 Section 05
Black plate (21,1) Ejecting a disc Y ou can specify a holder that you eject a disc from. 1 Press OPEN on the unit to display load- ing/ejecting menu. The LCD panel opens halfway , and the load- ing/ejecting menu is displayed on the screen. ! If the disc in the holder has already been played, the disc type is displayed on the holder icon (e.g. CD, DVD etc.). ! NO DISC is displayed for an empty holder . 2 T ouch h next to the holder you want to eject the disc from. The disc is ejected. # Y ou can eject all loaded discs at once. T o do this, touch ALL h. T o cancel the all ejecting, touch CANCEL. 3 T o replace the LCD panel to the original position, pre ss OPEN on the unit. Adjusting the flap angle Y ou can adjust the flap angle as needed. Important When adjusting the flap angle, be sure to follow the procedures explained below . Forcibly adjust- ing the flap angle by hand may damage it. 1 Press and hold OPEN button on the unit to display the flap angle adjust menu. 2 T ouch or - to adjust the flap angle. Each time you touch , the flap comes out to- ward you. T ouching - moves the flap the other way around. ! Y ou can select from five positions for the flap angle. ! The adjusted flap angle will be memorized. The next time you eject or load discs, the flap returns to the position where you set the angle. Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. P ress VOLUME to increase or decrease the source volume. With the remote control, press VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. T urning the unit off % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch OFF. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # When using the buttons, press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off . # T o completely turn the display off , touch and hold DISP . OFF . Refer to Using the common touch panel keys on the next page. <CRB2163-B>21 Basic Operation s En 21 Section 05 Basic Operations
Black plate (22,1) T ouch panel key basic operation Activating the touch panel keys 4 2 3 1 1 Common touch panel keys F or details, refer to Using the common touch panel keys on this page. 2 Information bar 3 T ouch panel keys T ouch to do various operations. 4 Clock display T o turn the clock on or off , or to adjust the time, refer to Setting the clock on page 88. 1 T ouch the screen to activate the touch panel keys corresponding to each source. The touch panel keys appear on the display . # T o go to the next group of touch panel keys, touch d . 2 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Using the common touch panel keys EQ , AUDIO MENU and DISP . OFF keys are commonly displayed in the source menu. EQ key T ouch EQ to display the equalizer cur ve setting menu. Adjust the equalizer curve and make the best sound characteristic for the sound type. F or details concerning operation, refer to Using the equalizer on page 71. AUDIO MENU key T ouch AUDIO MENU to display the menu for various settings. F or details concerning operation, refer to Oper- ating the menu on the next page. DISP . OFF key T ouch and hold DISP . OFF to turn the display off . T ouch the screen to turn the display on. Using DISP . OFF to retract the vehicle â s antenna At the standard setting, the vehicle âÂÂs auto an- tenna is automatically retracted when you se- lect the source OFF. However , when a navigation unit or AVG- VDP1 is connected to this unit, your vehicle âÂÂs antenna may be kept up-position even if the source OFF is selected. In that case, use DISP . OFF key and have the antenna retracted manually . ! Only when A VG-VDP1 is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. % T ouch the source OFF, and then, touch and hold DISP . OFF. The display is turned off and your vehicle âÂÂs an- tenna is retracted. ! When AVG-VDP1 and the multi-channel processor (e.g. DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) are connected to this unit, the antenna should be retracted at the time when the source OFF is selected. ! While the antenna is retracted, a beep from AVG- VDP1 is not properly mixed with the audio sound outputte d from this unit. <CRB2163-B>22 Basic Operation s En 22 Section 05
Black plate (23,1) Operating the menu 1 4 5 2 3 1 FUNCTION key T ouch to select functions for each source. 2 AUDIO key T ouch to select various sound quality con- trols. 3 SETUP key T ouch to select various setup functions. 4 BACK key T ouch to return to the previous display. 5 ESC key T ouch to cancel the control mode of func- tions. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch the desired key to display the function names you want to operate. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 3 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. <CRB2163-B>23 Basic Operation s En 23 Section 05 Basic Operations
Black plate (24,1) Listening to the radio 1 2 6 5 7 4 3 8 These are the basic steps necessar y to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to, AM or FM. 4 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 5 STEREO indicator Shows when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. 6 LOCAL indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 7 Frequency indicator Shows the frequency to which the tuner is tuned. 8 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TUNER to select the tuner . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, FM1 , FM2, FM3 for FM or AM. 4 T o select a preset channel, touch a pre- set channel on the list or touch a or b (P .CH). The preset channel you selected is tuned in. # T ouching LIST switches between the preset channel list display and the a/ b ( P .CH ) display . Either way, the channels that can be selected are the same. 5 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. The frequencies move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by mov- ing the joystick on the remote control left or right. 6 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip sta- tions. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the key . # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . <CRB2163-B>24 T uner En 24 Section 06
Black plate (25,1) Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 you can easily store up to six broad- cast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a key . % When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory keep touching one of preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have touched will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memor y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the radio station frequency is recalled from memor y. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. # When P1 âÂÂP6 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching LIST . Notes ! Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six AM stations can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 by moving the joystick on the remote control up or down. Introduction of advanced tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the frequenc y display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the frequency display . Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a key . <CRB2163-B>25 T uner En 25 Section 06 T uner
Black plate (26,1) % T ouch BSM on the function menu to turn BSM on. BSM appears. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM dis- appears. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSM again. Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may re- place broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 âÂÂP6 . T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 T ouch LOCAL on the function menu. 2 T ouch c on the LOCAL setting to turn local seek tuning on. # T o turn local seek tuning off , touch d. 3 T ouch c or d on the LEVEL setting to set the sensitivity . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM: FM: 1 âÂÂ2 âÂÂ3 âÂÂ4 The 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. <CRB2163-B>26 T uner En 26 Section 06
Black plate (27,1) W atching a DVD video 5 4 2 3 8 b a 6 7 9 1 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DVD video with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DVD video operation is explained start- ing on page 32. ! Switch the remote control operation mode to DVD to per form DVD operations. (Refer to page 18.) 1 DVD Video indicator Shows when a DVD video is playing. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 Audio language indicator Shows which audio language has been se- lected. 5 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. 6 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter . 8 Viewing angle indicator Shows which viewing angle has been se- lected. 9 Subtitle language indicator Shows which subtitle language has been selected. a Audio output indicator Shows the output channel selected cur- rently . b Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch a desired DVD holder number (e.g. DISC 1) to select the DVD player . Selectable DVD holders are highlighted. If a disc is not inserted, you cannot select that DVD holder . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # With some discs, a menu may be displayed. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next page.) # This unit does not automatically change discs even if it reaches to the end of the currently play- ing disc. T o change discs, press a or b button (DISC) on the remote control. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch d to switch the menu. T ouching d repeatedly changes the menus. 4 T o skip back or forward to another chapter , touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next chapter . T ouching o once skips to the start of the current chapter . T ouching it again will skip to the previous chapter . <CRB2163-B>27 Playing DVD video discs En 27 Section 07 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (28,1) # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another chapter by pressing o or p button on the re- mote control. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you release o or p. T o resume playback at a desired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding m or n button on the remote control. # F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Operating the DVD menu Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc contents using a menu. ! Y ou can display the menu by touching MENU or TOP MENU while a disc is play- ing. T ouching either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location se- lected from the menu. F or details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. 1 T ouch î î î to display touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. 2 T ouch a, b, c or d to select the desired menu item. 3 T ouch ENTER. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. Operating the DVD menu with 10 key Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc contents using 10KEY . 1 T ouch 10KEY. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 corresponding to a menu number and then touch ENTER to start playback. ! T o select 3, touch 3. ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in that order . Skipping back or forward to another title % T ouch a or b title key to skip back or forward to another title. T ouching a skips to the start of the next title. T ouching b skips to the start of the previous title. Title numbers are displayed for eight seconds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another title by moving the joystick up or down. Stopping playback % T ouch g. # When you stop DVD playback by touching g, that location on the disc is memorized, enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. <CRB2163-B>28 Playing DVD video discs En 28 Section 07
Black plate (29,1) % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE is displayed on the information bar and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Resume playback (Bookmark) The Bookmark function lets you resume play- back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. % During playback, touch BOOKMARK at the point you want to resume playback next time. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. Y ou can bookmark up to six discs. After that, the oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. # T o clear the bookmark on a disc, keep touch- ing BOOKMARK during playback. # Y ou can also bookmark a disc using BOOKMARK button on the remote control. Note One bookmark point can be stored for each disc holder independently . Frame-by-frame playba ck This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % T ouch r during playback. Each time you touch r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Keep touching r during playback. A beep sounds and forward slow motion play- back begins. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . 2 T ouch q or r to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you touch q or r it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 âÂÂ1/8 âÂÂ1/4 âÂÂ1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. <CRB2163-B>29 Playing DVD video discs En 29 Section 07 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (30,1) Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a title or chapter , and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. ! Chapter search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH. 2 T ouch TITLE (title), CHAP . (chapter) or TIME (time). 3 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . For titles and chapters ! T o select 3, touch 3. ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in that order . For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2, 1, 4 and 3 in that order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7 , 1, 0 and 0 in that order . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 4 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected scene. Notes ! With discs featuring a menu, you can also touch MENU or TOP MENU and then make selections from the displayed menu. ! With some discs, the icon may be dis- played, indicating that titles, chapters and time cannot be specified. Specifying title Y ou can use the direct search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a title. 1 T ouch 10KEY. # This feature is available only when the play- back is stopped. If you are playing back a disc, touch g to stop the playback and then touch 10KEY . 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 corresponding to a desired title number . ! T o select 3, touch 3. ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in that order . 3 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch . Title number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected title. Note T o per form this function with the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to DVD . (Refer to Using the r emote control operation mode switch on page 18.) Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. % T ouch AUDIO during playback. Each time you touch AUDIO it switches be- tween audio systems. <CRB2163-B>30 Playing DVD video discs En 30 Section 07
Black plate (31,1) Notes ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using AUDIO on the remote control. ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD âÂÂs package indicates the number of recorded languages/audio systems. ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using DVD SETUP . For details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 91. ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If this unit âÂÂs optical digital outputs are not con- nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. ! T ouching AUDIO during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. % T ouch SUB TITLE during playback. Each time you touch SUB TITLE it switches be- tween subtitle languages. Notes ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using SUB TITLE on the remote con- trol. ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD âÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded subtitle languages. ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using DVD SETUP. For details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 90. ! T ouching SUB TITLE during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback re- turns you to normal playback. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is dis- played. T urn angle icon display on or off using DVD SETUP . For details, refer to Set- ting the angle icon display on page 91. % T ouch ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. Each time you touch ANGLE it switches be- tween angles. Notes ! Y ou can also change the angle using ANGLE on the remote control. ! The 3 mark on a DVD â s package indicates it features multi-angle scenes. The number in the 3 mark indicates the number of angles from which scenes were shot. ! T ouching ANGLE during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. <CRB2163-B>31 Playing DVD video discs En 31 Section 07 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (32,1) Return to the specified scene Y ou can return to the specified scene where the DVD you are currently playing has been preprogrammed to return. % T ouch RETURN to return to the speci- fied scene. Note If a specified scene has not been preprogrammed in DVD disc, this function is not possible. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted, this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati- cally and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. % T ouch AUTO PLA Y to turn automatic playback on. # T o turn automatic playback off , touch AUTO PLA Y again. # Y ou can also turn automatic playback on or off by pressing AUTO PLA Y button on the remote control. # When the automatic playback is on, you can- not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on this page). Introduction of advanced DVD video operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the DVD playback : DISC (disc repeat), CHAPTER (chap- ter repeat), and TITLE (title repeat). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! DISC â Play through the current disc ! CHAPTER â Repeat just the current chapter <CRB2163-B>32 Playing DVD video discs En 32 Section 07
Black plate (33,1) ! TITLE â R epeat just the current title Notes ! If you per form chapter search or fast for ward/ reverse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the function may not be se- lectable, indicating that operating this function is not possible. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch the audio output. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the function may not be selectable, indicating that operating this function is not pos- sible. <CRB2163-B>33 Playing DVD video discs En 33 Section 07 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (34,1) W atching a Video CD 2 1 3 6 7 4 5 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a Video CD with your DVD player . More ad- vanced Video CD operation is explained start- ing on page 37. ! Switch the remote control operation mode to DVD to per form video CD operations. (Refer to page 18.) 1 Video CD indicator Shows when a Video CD is playing. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 6 Audio output indicator Shows the output channel selected cur- rently . 7 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch a desired DVD holder number (e.g. DISC 1) to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function, a menu is displayed. # This unit does not automatically change discs even if it reaches to the end of the currently play- ing disc. T o change discs, press a or b button (DISC) on the remote control. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch 10KEY and then touch 0 âÂÂ9 to se- lect the desired menu item. # Depending on the discs, the menu may be two or more pages long. In such case, touch o or p to display the next or previous menu. Once you confirm a desired menu number , touch 10KEY to make the selection. 4 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch . Playback starts from the selected menu item. # Y ou can display the menu by pressing RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. 5 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing o or p button on the re- mote control. # During PBC playback, a menu may be dis- played if you per form these operations. <CRB2163-B>34 Playing Video CDs En 34 Section 08
Black plate (35,1) 6 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you release o or p. T o resume playback at a desired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding m or n button on the remote control. # F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Stopping playback % T ouch g. # When you stop Video CD playback (during PBC playback only) by touching g, that location on the disc is memorized, enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Pausing Video CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE is displayed on the information bar and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Frame-by-frame playba ck This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % T ouch r during playback. Each time you touch r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Keep touching r during playback. A beep sounds and forward slow motion play- back begins. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . 2 T ouch q or r to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you touch q or r it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 âÂÂ1/8 âÂÂ1/4 âÂÂ1/2 <CRB2163-B>35 Playing Video CDs En 35 Section 08 Playing Video CDs
Black plate (36,1) Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a track, and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. ! Time search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH. 2 T ouch TRACK (track) or TIME (time). 3 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . For tracks ! T o select 3, touch 3. ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in that order . For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2, 1, 4 and 3 in that order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7 , 1, 0 and 0 in that order . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 4 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected scene. PBC playback During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON is displayed. Y ou can operate PBC menu with 10KEY. 1 When PBC menu is displayed, touch 10KEY. # Y ou can display the menu by touching RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. # Depending on the discs, the menu may be two or more pages long. In such case, touch o or p to display the next or previous menu. Once you confirm a desired menu number , touch 10KEY to make the selection. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 corresponding to a menu number and then touch to start play- back. ! T o select 3, touch 3. ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in that order . Notes ! PBC playback of Video-CD cannot be can- celled. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON, search and time search functions cannot be used nor can you select the range for repeat play . <CRB2163-B>36 Playing Video CDs En 36 Section 08
Black plate (37,1) Introduction of advanced Video CD operati on 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the V ideo CD playback: TRACK (track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track ! DISC â Repeat the current disc Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . Selecting audio output Y ou can switch the audio output. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right Notes ! Y ou can also switch the audio output using AUDIO on the remote control. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the function may not be se- lectable, indicating that operating this function is not possible. <CRB2163-B>37 Playing Video CDs En 37 Section 08 Playing Video CDs
Black plate (38,1) Listening to a CD 2 1 4 3 5 6 7 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your DVD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on page 40. 1 CD/CD-TEXT indicator Shows when a CD is playing. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc. 5 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 7 Repeat indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch a desired DVD holder number (e.g. DISC 1) to select the DVD player . Selectable DVD holders are highlighted. If a disc is not inserted, you cannot select that DVD holder . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # This unit does not automatically change discs even if it reaches to the end of the currently play- ing disc. T o change discs, press a or b button (DISC) on the remote control. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch LIST to display track titles and touch a desired title that you want to play back. The selected track will begin to play . 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # If tracks are many , you can change to the pre- vious or next page of the track list by touching or . # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d button on the unit or moving the joystick on the remote control left or right. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d button on the unit or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. <CRB2163-B>38 Playing CDs En 38 Section 09
Black plate (39,1) Notes ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD-DA by touching MEDIA or pressing BAND/ESC . This function can be operated only when the disc is playing. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto- matically . Stopping playback % T ouch g. # When you stop CD playback by touching g, that location on the disc is memorized, enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE appears in the display . Play of the cur- rent track pauses. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Using CD TEXT func tions Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist âÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Disc Title (disc title) âÂÂDisc Artist (disc artist name) â T rack Title (track title) âÂÂT rack Artist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO T .ARTIST NAME ). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 20 letters only of Disc Title , Disc Artist , T rack Title and T rack Artist . When the recorded information is longer than 20 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the title be- gins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the dis- play . <CRB2163-B>39 Playing CDs En 39 Section 09 Playing CDs
Black plate (40,1) Introduction of advanced CD operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. Repeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track ! DISC â Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA), repeat play performs within the currently playing data type even if DISC is selected. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order . % T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 2 When you find the desir ed track touch SCAN again. Note After scanning of a CD is finished, normal play- back of the tracks will begin again. <CRB2163-B>40 Playing CDs En 40 Section 09
Black plate (41,1) Listening to MP3/WMA 2 1 4 5 6 7 3 7 These are the basic steps necessar y to play an MP3/WMA with your built-in DVD player . More advanced MP3/WMA operation is explained starting on page 44. 1 Media indicator MP3 , WMA or MIX appears depending on the file format you are playing. When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD -EXTRA and MIXED -MODE CDs, MIX is displayed. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 Folder name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing folder . 5 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 6 T rack number indicator Shows the track (file) number currently play- ing. 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track (file). 8 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch a desired DVD holder number (e.g. DISC 1) to select the DVD player . Selectable DVD holders are highlighted. If a disc is not inserted, you cannot select that DVD holder . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch LIST to display track titles and touch a desired title that you want to play back. The selected track will begin to play . 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d button on the unit or moving the joystick on the remote control left or right. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d button on the unit or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. # There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. <CRB2163-B>41 Playing MP3/WMA En 41 Section 10 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (42,1) 6 T o select a folder , touch to show the folder one level higher and touch a folder name on the list. # Y ou can also select the next or previous folder by pressing a or b button (FOLDER) on the re- mote control. # T o return to folder 001 (ROOT), press and hold BAND/ESC . However , if folder 001 (ROOT) con- tains no files, playback commences with folder 002 . # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have an MP3/WMA file recorded in it. Notes ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD-DA by touching MEDIA or pressing BAND/ESC . This function can be operated only when the disc is playing. ! If you have switched between playback of MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA), play- back starts at the first track on the disc. ! This DVD player can play back an MP3/WMA file recorded on CD-ROM. (Refer to page 108 for files that can be played back.) ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued. When being read, FORMA T READ is dis- played. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 001 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 002.) ! This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. ! If the inserted disc contains no files that can be played back, NON-PLA Y ABLE DISC is dis- played. ! When playing an MP3/WMA disc containing more than 192 tracks, READY appears on the information bar for the track titles of 193rd and later . ! If the inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by digital rights management (DRM) , TRACK SKIPPED is displayed while the protected file is skipped. ! If all the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM, PROTECT is displayed. ! Once PROTECT is displayed for playing discs secured by DRM, switching from audio data (CD-DA) to WMA files may become a trigger to lock the list touch panel keys. In such case, touch LIST to turn the list display off and then touch LIST again to turn it on. The list touch panel keys should be reactivated. ! When a disc contains both WMA files which are protected by DRM and audio data (CD- DA), both types cannot be switched. In this case, only audio data will be played back. ! There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto- matically . Stopping playback % T ouch g. # When you stop MP3/WMA playback by touch- ing g, that location on the disc is memorized, en- abling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Pausing MP3/WMA playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. <CRB2163-B>42 Playing MP3/WMA En 42 Section 10
Black plate (43,1) % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE appears in the display . Play of the cur- rent track pauses. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Displaying information on MP3/WMA file Information recorded on an MP3/WMA disc can be displayed. 1 T ouch FILE INFO to display information on the MP3/WMA file you are currently playing. ! ALBUM (album title) ! TRACK (track title) ! FOLDER (folder name) ! FILE (file name) ! ARTIST (artist name) ! GENRE (genre) ! YEAR (year) # When playing back WMA files, lists of album title, genre and year appear in blank. # If specific information has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA file, the list appears in blank. # Depending on the version of ID3 tag or Win- dows Media Player , the information may not be displayed correctly. 2 T o return to the normal display , touch ESC. Displaying text information on MP3/WMA disc T ext information recorded on an MP3/WMA disc can be displayed on the information bar . % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Folder Name (folder name) âÂÂFile Name (file name) â T rack Title (track title) âÂÂArtist Name (artist name) â Album Title (album title) â Comment (comment) â BitRate (bit rate) # When playing back WMA files, album title and comment are not displayed. # When a list of folders/files is displayed by the touch of LIST , Current (currently playing folder) is displayed instead of Folder Name . # When playing back MP3 files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the bit rate value is not dis- played even af ter switching to bit rate. ( VBR will be displayed.) # If specific information has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA disc, NO XXXX will be dis- played (e.g., NO ARTIST NAME). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 20 letters only of Folder Name , File Name , T rack Title , Artist Name , Album Title and Comment on the information bar . When the recorded infor- mation is longer than 20 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the text in- formation can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the text infor - mation begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the text informatio n will appear in the display. <CRB2163-B>43 Playing MP3/WMA En 43 Section 10 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (44,1) Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (MP3/ WMA) operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. Repeating play F or MP3/WMA playback, there are three re- peat play ranges: FOLDER (folder repeat), TRACK (one-track repeat) and DISC (repeat all tracks). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! DISC â Repeat all tracks ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER. ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA), repeat play performs within the currently playing data type even if DISC is selected. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, FOLDER and DISC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected FOLDER or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. <CRB2163-B>44 Playing MP3/WMA En 44 Section 10
Black plate (45,1) Scanning folders and tracks While you are using FOLDER , the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using DISC , the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. 3 When you find the desir ed track (or folder) touch SCAN again. Note After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. <CRB2163-B>45 Playing MP3/WMA En 45 Section 10 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (46,1) Listening to a CD 1 5 6 4 3 2 8 7 Y ou can use this unit to contr ol a multi-CD player , which is sold separately . These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your multi- CD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on page 48. 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc. 5 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 7 Disc list display Shows the disc title list. 8 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch M-CD to select the multi-CD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch LIST to display disc titles and touch a desired disc that you want to play back. Operable disc titles are highlighted. If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12, touch or to display 07 âÂÂ12 . # If the connected multi-CD player is not com- patible with the disc title list function, LIST is not displayed. 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d button on the unit or moving the joystick on the remote control left or right. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching c or d. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d button on the unit or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. Notes ! When the multi-CD player per forms the pre- paratory operations, READY is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to the multi-CD player owner âÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. <CRB2163-B>46 Multi-CD Player En 46 Section 11
Black plate (47,1) ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto- matically . Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE appears in the display . Play of the cur- rent track pauses. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Using CD TEXT func tions Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi- CD player . Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist âÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs T ext information recorded on a CD TEXT disc can be displayed on the information bar . % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Disc Title (disc title) âÂÂDisc Artist (disc artist name) â T rack Title (track title) âÂÂT rack Artist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO T .ARTIST NAME ). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 20 letters only of Disc Title , Disc Artist , T rack Title and T rack Artist on the information bar . When the recorded information is longer than 20 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the title be- gins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the display . Selecting tracks from the track title list T rack title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them to play back. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU and FUNCTION and then touch TRACK LIST. 2 T ouch or to switch between the lists of titles. 3 T ouch your favorite track title. That selection will begin to play . 50-disc multi-CD player Only those functions described in this manual are supported by 50-disc multi-CD players. <CRB2163-B>47 Multi-CD Player En 47 Section 11 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (48,1) Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the playback display. Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-CD player: M-CD (multi-CD player re- peat), TRACK (one-track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! M-CD â R epeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track ! DISC â Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to M-CD . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in ran- dom order within the repeat range, M-CD and DISC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected M-CD or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. <CRB2163-B>48 Multi-CD Player En 48 Section 11
Black plate (49,1) Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using DISC , the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using M-CD , the beginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. 3 When you find the desir ed track (or disc) touch SCAN again. Note After track or disc scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selec- tions. Creating a playlist with ITS programming Y ou can use ITS to enter and play back up to 99 tracks per disc from up to 100 discs. (With multi-CD players sold before the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. T ouch a or b to select the CD. 2 T ouch ITS MEMOR Y on the function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired track. 4 T ouch MEMORY to store the currently playing track in the playlist. MEMOR Y is displayed and the currently play- ing selection is added to your playlist. The dis- play then shows track number again. Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in mem- or y , data for a new disc will over write the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi-CD player will begin to play . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch ITS PLA Y on the function menu to tur n ITS play on. Playback begins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected M-CD or DISC ranges. # If no tracks in the current range are pro- grammed for ITS play , then ITS EMPTY is dis- played. # T o turn ITS play off , touch ITS PLA Y again. <CRB2163-B>49 Multi-CD Player En 49 Section 11 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (50,1) Erasing a track from your ITS playlist Y ou can delete a track from your ITS playlist if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. 1 Play the CD with the track you want to delete from your ITS playlist, and tur n ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on the previous page. 2 T ouch ITS MEMOR Y on the function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired track. 4 T ouch CLEAR to erase the track from your ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, ITS EMPTY is displayed and nor- mal play resumes. Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist Y ou can delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist if ITS play is off . 1 Play the CD that you want to delete. T ouch a or b to select the CD. 2 T ouch ITS MEMOR Y on the function menu. 3 T ouch CLEAR to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD from your ITS playlist. ITS CLEAR is displayed and all tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist. Using compression and bass emphasis Y ou can use these functions only with a multi- CD player that supports them. Using COMP (compression) and DBE (dy- namic bass emphasis) functions lets you ad- just the sound playback quality of the multi- CD player . Each of the functions has a two - step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at high- er volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. % T ouch COMPRESSION on the function menu to select your favorite setting. T ouch COMPRESSI ON repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 â COMP OFF âÂÂDBE 1 âÂÂDBE 2 # If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE, COMPRESSION cannot be selected. <CRB2163-B>50 Multi-CD Player En 50 Section 11
Black plate (51,1) W atching the television 1 3 4 5 2 6 Y ou can use this unit to contr ol a TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P5750TV(P)), which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. This section pro- vides information on TV operations with this unit which differs from that described in the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. Important Depending on the TV tuner connected to this unit, some functions may not be operable. F or de- tails, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to. 4 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 5 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned. 6 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, TV1 or TV2 . 4 T o select a preset channel, touch LIST to display preset channels and touch a desired preset channel. The preset channel you selected is tuned in. 5 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. The channels move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by press- ing c or d button or moving the joystick on the remote control lef t or right. 6 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the channels until a broad- cast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by pressing and holding c or d button or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . <CRB2163-B>51 TV tuner En 51 Section 12 TV tuner
Black plate (52,1) Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 you can easily store up to 12 broad- cast stations for later recall with the touch of a key . % When you find a station that you want to store in memory , keep touching one of preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 until the pre- set number stops flashing. The number you have touched will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected station has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the station is recalled from memor y . # T o switch between P01 âÂÂP06 and P07 âÂÂP12 , touch or . # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. # When P01 âÂÂP06 and P07 âÂÂP12 are not dis- played, you can display them by touching LIST . Notes ! Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV bands, can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations assigned to preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 . Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the TV picture, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatic ally returned to the TV picture. <CRB2163-B>52 TV tuner En 52 Section 12
Black plate (53,1) Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially % T ouch BSSM on the function menu to turn BSSM on. BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored in order from the lowest channel up. When finished, BSSM disappears. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSSM again. Note Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re- place broadcast stations you have saved using P01 âÂÂP12 . Selecting the area group 1 T ouch COUNTRY on the function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the area group. T ouch c or d until the desired area group ap- pears in the display. COUNTR Y 1 (CCIR channel) âÂÂCOUNTRY 2 (IN channel) â COUNTR Y 3 (CHN channel) â COUNTR Y 4 (U.K. channel) âÂÂCOUNTRY 5 (OIRT channel) â COUNTR Y 6 (AUSTRALIA channel) â COUNTRY 7 (SAF channel) <CRB2163-B>53 TV tuner En 53 Section 12 TV tuner
Black plate (54,1) Listening to songs on your iPod 2 1 5 4 6 3 7 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Song number indicator Shows the number of song played in the se- lected list. 4 Repeat indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. 5 Shuffle indicator Shows when random play is set to Song or Album . 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent song. 7 Song information Shows detailed information of currently playing song. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch iPod to select the iPod. # When the iP od is not connected to this unit, you cannot select the iP od as a source. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another song, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next song. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current song. T ouching it again will skip to the previous song. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another song by pressing c or d button on the unit or moving the joystick on the remote control left or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d button on the unit or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. Note If the iPod contains no songs that can be played back, NO SONGS is displayed. Browsing for a song The operation of this unit to control an iP od is designed to be as close to the operation of the iP od as possible for easy operation and song search. 1 T ouch TOP to display the top menu. 2 T ouch one of the categories in which you want to search for a song. ! PLA YLISTS (playlists) <CRB2163-B>54 Playing songs on iPod En 54 Section 13
Black plate (55,1) ! ARTISTS (artists) ! ALBUMS (albums) ! SONGS (songs) ! GENRES (genres) 3 T ouch a list title that you want to play . Repeat this operation until you find the de- sired song. # Y ou can start a playback of all the songs in the selected list ( GENRES , ARTISTS or ALBUMS). T o do this, touch ALL . # T o go to the next group of list titles, touch . # T o return to the previous group of list titles, touch . # T o return to the previous menu, touch . # T o go to the top menu of the list search, touch TOP . Note If the playback stops for any reason, touch TOP and refine your search for a song. Pausing a song P ause lets you temporarily stop playback of a song. % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE appears in the display . # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Displaying text information on iPod T ext information recorded on the iP od can be displayed on the information bar . % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Song Title (song title) âÂÂArtist Name (artist name) â Album Title (album title) # If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compatible with a head unit, those characters will not be displayed. Note Y ou can scroll the title to the left by keeping touching DISP. Displaying information on song Song title, artist name, album title of the cur- rently playing song can be displayed (if they have been entered in iP od) together with the index and the remaining playback time in the form of the status bar . % T ouch FILE INFO to display information on the song you are currently playing. Song informatio n is displayed. ! Status bar shows the remaining playback time. The bar is filled up from the left to the right as the playback time is consumed. Repeating play Y ou can repeat one song over and over . ! While this unit is set to repea t one song, you cannot select the other songs. % T ouch to repeat one song. appears on the information bar and the currently playing song repeats. <CRB2163-B>55 Playing songs on iPod En 55 Section 13 Playing songs on iPod
Black plate (56,1) # When you do not set to repeat one song, this unit repeats all songs in the currently selected list (e.g. ARTISTS, ALBUMS). Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two random play methods: Song (play back songs in a random order) and Album (play back albums in a random order). % T ouch to select the random play method. T ouch repeatedly until the desired random play method appears in the display . ! Song â Play back songs in a random order within the selected list ! Album â Select an album randomly , and then play back all the songs in it in order # T o cancel the random play , touch repeat- edly to turn the shuffle icon off . <CRB2163-B>56 Playing songs on iPod En 56 Section 13
Black plate (57,1) Listening to songs on BT Audio (Bluetooth audio player) 4 3 2 1 If you connect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD - BTB100) to this unit, you can control Bluetooth audio player via Bluetooth wir eless technology . F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief informatio n on Blue- tooth audio player operations with this unit which slightly differes or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. ! Even though your audio player does not contain a Bluetooth module, you can still control it from this unit via Bluetooth wire- less technology. T o control your audio player by using this unit, connect a product featuring Bluetooth wireless technology (available on the market) to your audio player and connect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100) to this unit. Important ! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player con- nected to this unit, the available operations with this unit are limited to the following two levels: â Lower level: Only playing back songs on your audio player is possible. â Higher level: Playing back, pausing, select- ing songs, etc., are possible (all the opera- tions illustrated in this manual). ! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market, operations with your Bluetooth audio player using this unit var y in great range. Please refer to the in- struction manual that came with your Blue- tooth audio player as well as this manual while operating your player on this unit. ! Information about songs (e.g. the elapsed playing time, song title, song index, etc.) can- not be displayed on this unit. ! While you are listening to songs on your Blue- tooth audio player , please refrain from operat- ing on your cellular phone as much as possible. If you tr y operating on your cellular phone, the signal from your cellular phone may cause a noise on the song playback. ! When you are talking on the cellular phone connected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology , the song playback from your Blue- tooth audio player connected to this unit is muted. ! Even if while you are listening to song on your Bluetooth audio player you switch to another source, the playback of song continues to elapse. 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Device name Shows the device name of the connected Bluetooth audio player (or Bluetooth adap- ter). 4 Connection indicator Shows the Bluetooth wireless connection status. % T ouch the source icon and then touch BT Audio to select the Bluetooth audio source. <CRB2163-B>57 Bluetooth Audio En 57 Section 14 Bluetooth Audio
Black plate (58,1) Connecting a Bluetooth audio player 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . 3 T ouch CONNECT OPEN to turn the con- nection open on. ON is displayed. This unit is now on standby for connection from Bluetooth audio player . If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, the connection to this unit will be automatically established. Note Before you can use audio players you may need to enter the PIN code into this unit. If your player requires a PIN code to establish a connection, look for the code on the player or in its accompa- nying documentation . Enter the PIN code refer- ring to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 97. Playing songs on Bluetooth audio player 1 T ouch d. Playback starts. 2 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d button on the unit or moving the joystick on the remote control left or right. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d button on the unit or holding the joystick on the remote control left or right. 4 T o pause the playback, touch e. Playback is paused. 1 <CRB2163-B>58 Bluetooth Audio En 58 Section 14
Black plate (59,1) Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . 3 T ouch DISCONNECT and then touch ON. After the disconnection is completed, No Connection is displayed. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . 3 T ouch DEVICE INFO to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! DEVICE NAME (device name of this unit) ! BD ADDRESS (address of Bluetooth device) ! SYSTEM VERSION (system version) ! BT MODULE VERSION (version of Blue- tooth module) <CRB2163-B>59 Bluetooth Audio En 59 Section 14 Bluetooth Audio
Black plate (60,1) Hands-free phoning with cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1 5 If you use Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100), you can connect a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology to this unit for hands-free, wireless calls, even while driving. F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief informatio n on the hands-free phoning operations with this unit which slightly differes or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. Important Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phones via Bluetooth wireless technol- ogy , using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. 1 Source name Shows the selected source name. 2 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 Phone number Shows the phone number you selected. 4 User number indicator Shows the registration number of the cellu- lar phone. 5 Device name Shows the device name of the cellular phone. 6 Incoming call notice indication Shows when an incoming call has been re- ceived and not checked yet. ! Incoming call notice is not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit. 7 Automatic answering/Automatic re ject- ing indicator Shows when the automatic answering func- tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting the automatic answering on page 68). Shows when the automatic rejecting func- tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting the automatic rejecting on page 68). 8 Battery strength indicator Shows the batter y strength of cellular phone. ! Batter y strength indicator may differ from the actual batter y strength. ! If the batter y strength is not available, nothing is displayed in the batter y strength indicator area. 9 Signal level indicator Shows the signal strength of cellular phone. ! Signal level indicator may differ from the actual signal level. ! Depending on the cellular phones featur- ing Bluetooth wireless technology, radio field intensity is not available. In this case, the signal level indicator does not appear . % T ouch the source icon and then touch TEL to select the telephone. <CRB2163-B>60 Bluetooth T elephone En 60 Section 15
Black plate (61,1) Note Equalizer cur ve for the phone source is fixed. When selecting the phone source, you cannot op- erate Using the equalizer on page 71. Setting up for hands-free phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you will need to set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. This entails es- tablishing a Bluetooth wireless connection be- tween this unit and your phone, registering your phone with this unit, and adjusting the volume level. 1 Connection F or detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech- nology , refer to Connecting a cellular phone on the next page. # Y our phone should now be temporarily con- nected; however , to make best use of the technol- ogy , we recommend you register the phone to this unit. 2 Registration Refer to Registering connected cellular phone on page 63 for instructions on how to register your temporaril y connected phone. 3 V olume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume on your cellular phone for comfort. When adjusted, the volume level is memorized in this unit as the default setting. # Caller âÂÂs voice volume and ring volume may vary depending on the type of cellular phones. # If the difference between the ring volume and caller âÂÂs voice volume is big, overall volume level may become unstable. # Before disconnecting cellular phone from this unit, make sure to adjust the volume to proper level. If the volume has been muted (zero level) on your cellular phone, the volume level of your cellular phone remains muted even aft er the cel- lular phone is disconnecte d from this unit. Basic operation of hands- free phoning Important Advanced operations that require your attention such as dialing numbers on the monitor , using phone book, etc., are prohibited while you are driving. When you need to use these advanced operations, stop your vehicle in a safe place and operate. Making a phone call V oice recognition 1 T ouch VOICE to tur n the voice recogni- tion function on. V oice dial icon appears on the information bar . V oice recognition function is now ready . # T o cancel the voice recognition function, touch VOICE again . 2 Pronounce the name of your contact. T aking a phone call Answering an incoming call 1 When a call comes in, touch . T ouching switches between callers on hold. <CRB2163-B>61 Bluetooth T elephone En 61 Section 15 Bluetooth T elephone
Black plate (62,1) 2 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Rejecting an incoming call % When a call comes in, touch . The call is rejected. Answering a call waiting 1 T ouch to answer a call waiting. 2 T ouch to end the call. The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). # T ouching ends the call you are talking on. Or with some cellular phones, touching may end all calls including the calls on hold. Rejecting a call waiting % T ouch to re ject a call waiting. Introduction of advanced hands-free phoning operation 3 1 Function display Shows the function status. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Connecting a cellular phone Searching for available cellular phones 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. <CRB2163-B>62 Bluetooth T elephone En 62 Section 15
Black plate (63,1) 2 T ouch to search for available cellular phones. While searching, Search flashes. When avail- able cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wire- less technology are found, device names or Name Not Found (if names cannot be ob- tained) are displayed. # If this unit fails to find any available cellular phones, Not Found is displayed. 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, Connect flashes. T o com- plete the connection, please check the device name ( Pioneer BT unit) and enter the link code on your cellular phone. If the connection is established, Connected is displayed. # The link code is set to 0000 as default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 97. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch CONNECT OPEN. The unit is now on standby for connection from cellular phone. 3 Use cellular phone to connect to this unit. # The link code is set to 0000 as default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 97. Disconnecting a cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DISCONNECT to disconnect the currently connected cellular phone from this unit. After the disconnection is completed, No Connection is displayed. Registering connected cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. Registration assignments appear on the dis- play . F rom the top to the third assignment are for User phone 1, 2 and 3. The rest two assign- ments are for Guest phone 1 and 2. 2 T ouch and hold one of the re gistration assignments to register the currenctly con- nected phone. If the registration is succeeded, the device name of the connected phone is displayed in the selected assignment. # If the assignment is empty , No Data is dis- played. If the assignment is already taken, the de- vice name appears. T o replace an assignment with a new phone, first delete the current assign- ment. For more detailed instructions, see Deleting a registered phone on the next page. # If the registration failed, device name of the connected phone is not displayed in the selected assignment. In this case, return to step 1 and tr y again. <CRB2163-B>63 Bluetooth T elephone En 63 Section 15 Bluetooth T elephone
Black plate (64,1) Deleting a registered phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. 2 T ouch DELETE next to the device name you want to delete. A confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the phone. # T o cancel, touch NO. Connecting to a registered cellular phone Connecting to a register ed phone manually 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DIRECT CONNECT. 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, Connect is flashing. If the connection is established, Connected is dis- played. Connecting to a register ed phone automatically % T ouch AUTO CONNECT on the function menu to turn the Automatic Connection function on. If your cellular phone is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection , the connection to this unit will be automatically established. # T o turn automatic connection off , touch AUTO CONNECT again. Using the Phone Book T ransferring entries to the Phone Book The Phone Book can hold a total of 500 en- tries; 300 from User 1, 150 from User 2, and 50 from User 3. 1 T ouch PHONE BOOK TRANSFER on the function menu. 2 T ouch ST ART to turn the Phone Book T ransfer function on. The Phone Book T ransfer is now on standby. 3 Use cellular phone to perform phone book transfer . P er form phone book transfer using the cellu- lar phone. F or detailed instruction on this, refer to the instruction manual that came with your cellular phone. # The display indicates how many entries have been transferred and the total number to be transferred. # T o cancel the transferring process, touch STOP . 4 When you are done transferring Phone Book entries, touch ESC. Note When the phone book transfer is complete, the connection to your cellular phone is off . T o use the Phone Book, connect to your cellular phone once again, referring to Connecting to a r egistered cellular phone on this page. <CRB2163-B>64 Bluetooth T elephone En 64 Section 15
Black plate (65,1) Changing the Phone Book display order % T ouch PHONE BOOK NAME VIEW on the function menu to turn Phone Book Name View function on. Display order for the Phone Book is changed. # T o change to the other display order , touch PHONE BOOK NAME VIEW again. Calling a number in the Phone Book Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . 1 On the normal display , touch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 T ouch a or b to select the first letter of the name you are looking for . T ouching a or b changes alphabetical letters. 3 T ouch ENTER to show entries starting with the letter you chose. The display shows the first six Phone Book en- tries starting with that letter (e.g. âÂÂBen â , â Brianâ and â Burtâ when â Bâ is selected). # T ouch or to display other phone book en- tries. # T o refine the search with a different letter , touch CLEAR. 4 T ouch a Phone Book entry you want to call. The display is switched to the Phone Book edit display . 5 T ouch phone number of the Phone Book entry you want to call. If several phone numbers are entered to an entr y , touch one you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the Phone Book entr y you selected is dis- played on the information bar . # If you do not want to call the selected phone number but remove it from the information bar , touch PHONE BOOK and then touch ESC . 6 T ouch to make a call. ! F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . 7 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Editing the name of a Phone Book entry Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . 1 On the normal display , touch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. See step two to three on Calling a number in the Phone Book on this page for how to do this. 3 T ouch EDIT next to the Phone Book entry name. The display is changed to the Phone Book edit display . 4 T ouch 123 or ABC to select the desired character type. Select ABC to input alphabet. Select 123 to input numbers and symbols. <CRB2163-B>65 Bluetooth T elephone En 65 Section 15 Bluetooth T elephone
Black plate (66,1) ! Each time you touch ABC , the alphabet type changes among upper case, lower case and symbol. 5 T ouch a or b to select an alphabet let- ter or number/symbol. 6 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position and edit the name. When the letter you want is displayed, touch d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . T ouch c to move backwards in the display. 7 T ouch OK to store the new name. Editing phone numbers Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . 1 On the normal display , touch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. See step two to three on Calling a number in the Phone Book on the previous page for how to do this. 3 T ouch EDIT next to the phone number you want to edit. The display is changed to the Phone Book dial edit display. 4 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input numbers. # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. 5 T ouch c or d to move the cursor and edit the number . Repeat these steps until you have finished changing. 6 T ouch OK to store the new number . Clearing a Phone Book entry Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . 1 On the normal display , touch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to delete. See step two to three on Calling a number in the Phone Book on the previous page for how to do this. 3 T ouch DELETE to delete the Phone Book entry . A confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the entr y . # T o cancel, touch NO. Using the Call History Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . The 12 most recent calls made (dialed), re- ceived and missed, are stored in the Call His- tor y . Y ou can browse the Call History and call numbers from it. <CRB2163-B>66 Bluetooth T elephone En 66 Section 15
Black plate (67,1) 1 On the normal display , touch LOG to display the Call History . T ouching LOG repeatedly switches between the following call histories: MISSED CALL LIST â DIALED CALL LIST â RECEIVED CALL LIST # T ouching DISP here switches between the phone number and the caller âÂÂs name (if it is in the Phone Book). 2 T ouch a phone number or name (if en- tered) you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the phone number you selected is displayed on the information bar . 3 T ouch to make a call. Using preset numbers Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . Assigning preset numbers Numbers that you dial frequently can be as- signed to presets for quick recall. Y ou can assign up to 6 frequently called phone numbers to number presets. 1 Select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call History . Or di- rectly enter a desired phone number . T o select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call Histor y , see the in- structions explained in previous pages. T o di- rectly enter a desired phone number , see Making a call by entering phone number on the next page. The display should now be the normal display and the selected phone number is displayed on the information bar . 2 On the normal display , touch LIST to display preset assignments. P reset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). 3 Keep touching one of pre set assign- ments to store the phone number . The phone number you selected is stored in presets. # No Data is displayed for empty assignment. Even if the assignment is taken, you can replace it to the new one by keeping touching the assign- ment. Recalling preset numbers 1 On the normal display , touch LIST to display preset assignments. P reset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). 2 T ouch one of preset assignments . The selected phone number should now be displayed on the information bar . 3 T ouch to make a call. 4 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). <CRB2163-B>67 Bluetooth T elephone En 67 Section 15 Bluetooth T elephone
Black plate (68,1) Making a call by entering phone number Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation . 1 On the normal display , touch DIRECT to display the direct dial display . 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input numbers. # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. # Up to 24 digits can be entered. # If you want to store the entered phone number to preset assignment, touch SET here. The display returns to the normal display and the phone num- ber you entered is selected. 3 When you completed entering the number , touch to make a call. 4 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Clearing memory 1 T ouch CLEAR MEMOR Y on the function menu. 2 T ouch CLEAR next to the item you want to delete from the memory . Select from the following: ! PHONE BOOK (phone book) ! DIALED CALLS (dialed call histor y) ! RECEIVED CALLS (received call histor y) ! MISSED CALLS (missed call histor y) ! PRESET DIALS (preset phone numbers) After selecting a desired item, a confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the mem- or y . # T o cancel, touch NO. # T ouch All clear to clear the memor y of all items. Setting the automatic answering % T ouch AUTO ANSWER on the function menu to turn the automatic answer on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn the automatic answer off , touch AUTO ANSWER again. Setting the automatic rejecting % T ouch REFUSE ALL CALLS on the func- tion menu to tur n the automatic call rejec- tion on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn the automatic call rejection off , touch REFUSE ALL CALLS again. Switching the ring tone % T ouch RING TONE on the function menu to tur n the ring tone on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn the ring tone off , touch RING TONE again. <CRB2163-B>68 Bluetooth T elephone En 68 Section 15
Black plate (69,1) Echo canceling and noise reduction % T ouch ECHO CANCEL on the function menu to turn Echo Cancel function on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn echo canceling off , touch ECHO CANCEL again. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address % T ouch Device info on the function menu to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! DEVICE NAME (device name of this unit) ! BD ADDRESS (address of Bluetooth device) ! SYSTEM VERSION (version of this unit âÂÂs microprocessor) ! BT MODULE VERSION (version of Blue- tooth module) <CRB2163-B>69 Bluetooth T elephone En 69 Section 15 Bluetooth T elephone
Black plate (70,1) Introduction of audio adjustments 1 1 Audio display Shows the audio function names. Important If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7650/DEQ- P6600) is connected to this unit, the audio func- tion will be changed to the multi-channel proces- sor âÂÂs audio menu. For details, refer to Introduction of DSP adjustments on page 75. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch AUDIO to display the audio func- tion names. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # Only when the PREOUT setting in the initial menu is FULL , NON FADING will be displayed in- stead of SUB WOOFER . (Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 94.) # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automat ically re- turned to the source display . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide you an ideal listening envir- onment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch FADER BALANCE on the audio function menu. # When the rear output setting is SUB. W , BALANCE will be displayed instead of FADER BALANCE . Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 94. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/r ear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :15 to REAR:15 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR:00 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. # When the rear output setting is SUB. W , you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 94. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the lef t or the right. LEFT :09 to RIGHT :09 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from lef t to right. <CRB2163-B>70 Audio Adjustments En 70 Section 16
Black plate (71,1) Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are six stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer curves: Display Equalizer curve Powerful P ower ful Natural Natural V ocal V ocal Custom Custom Flat Flat Super Bass Supe r bass ! Custom is an adjusted equalizer cur ve that you create. ! A separate Custom cur ve can be created for each source. If you make adjustments, the equalizer cur ve settings will be memor- ized in Custom . ! When Flat is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer cur ve. % On any source, touch EQ (displayed at the left bottom corn er) to select the equali- zer . T ouch EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: Powerful âÂÂNatural âÂÂV ocal âÂÂCustom âÂÂFlat â Super Bass Adjusting equalizer curves Y ou can adjust the currently selected equalizer cur ve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer cur ve settings are memorized in Custom. ! Y ou can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (cur ve characteristics) of each currently selec ted cur ve band ( LOW/ MID/ HIGH ). Level (dB) Center frequency Q=2N Q=2W F requency (Hz) 1 T ouch EQ MENU on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch c or d on the BAND setting to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) 3 T ouch c or d on the LEVEL setting to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the equalization band. 6 to âÂÂ6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. 4 T ouch c or d on the FREQUENCY set- ting to select the desired frequency . T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display. Low : 40Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ160Hz Mid: 200Hz â 500Hz â 1kHz âÂÂ2kHz High: 3.15kHz âÂÂ8kHz âÂÂ10kHz âÂÂ12.5kHz 5 T ouch c or d on the Q.F ACTOR setting to select the desired Q factor . T ouch c or d until the desired Q factor ap- pears in the display. 2N âÂÂ1N âÂÂ1W âÂÂ2W <CRB2163-B>71 Audio Adjustments En 71 Section 16 Audio Adjustments
Black plate (72,1) Note If you make adjustments, Custom cur ve is up- dated. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 T ouch LOUDNESS on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch c on the LOUDNESS setting to turn loudness on. # T o turn loudness off , touch d. 3 T ouch c or d on the MODE setting to select a desired level. Each time you touch c or d selects level in the following order: LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off . ! When the subwoofer output is on, you can adjust the cut-off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . 1 T ouch SUB WOOFER on the audio func- tion menu. # When the PREOUT setting in the initial menu is FULL , you cannot select SUB WOOFER . 2 T ouch c on the SUBWOOFER setting to turn subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch d. 3 T ouch c or d on the PHASE setting to select the phase of subwoofer output. T ouch d to select normal phase and NORMAL appears in the display . T ouch c to select reverse phase and REVERSE appears in the display. 4 T ouch c or d on the LEVEL setting to adjust the output level of the subwoofer . Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the subwoofer . 6 to â 6 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. 5 T ouch c or d on the FREQUENCY set- ting to select cut-off frequency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the sub- woofer . Using nonfading output When the nonfading output setting is on, the audio signal does not pass through this unit âÂÂs low pass filter (for the subwoofer), but is out- putted through the RCA output. 1 T ouch NON F ADING on the audio func- tion menu. # When the PREOUT setting in the initial menu is only FULL , you can select NON F ADING . (Re fer to page 94.) 2 T ouch c on the NON FADING setting to turn non fading output on. # T o turn non fading output off , touch d. 3 T ouch c or d on the LEVEL setting to adjust the output level of the non fading. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the non fading. 6 to â 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. <CRB2163-B>72 Audio Adjustments En 72 Section 16
Black plate (73,1) Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are outputted from the front or rear speakers. 1 T ouch HPF on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch c to turn high pass filter on. High pass filter is turned on and the cut-off fre- quency setting becomes available. # T o turn high pass filter off , touch d. 3 T ouch c or d to select cut-off fre- quency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ125Hz Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 T ouch SLA on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch a or b it increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 to âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD and MP3/WMA are set to the same source level adjustment volume auto - matically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! AUX (auxiliar y input) and AV (AV input) are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! SLA function does not adjust the volume for the BT telephone source. Staging for car environment Y ou can create in car a sound environment that can be best matched with the type of your listening music (or movie). 1 T ouch ST AGING on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch a desired staging field. ! OFF (off) ! MUSIC STUDIO (music studio) ! DYNAMIC THEA TER (dynamic theater) ! ACTOR âÂÂS ST AGE (actor âÂÂs stage) ! RELAX LIVING (relaxing living room) <CRB2163-B>73 Audio Adjustments En 73 Section 16 Audio Adjustments
Black plate (74,1) Selecting the listening position One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. Se- lecting the listening position lets you automa- tically adjust the speaker output levels and inserts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. When used with the staging function, the sound image will be more natural and you can feel as if a panora- mic sound envelops you. 1 T ouch POSITION on the staging menu. 2 T ouch one of the listening positions where you want to focus the sound image. ! LEFT (lef t) ! CENTER (center) ! RIGHT (right) Note When you make adjustments to the listening po- sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels. Y ou can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . <CRB2163-B>74 Audio Adjustments En 74 Section 16
Black plate (75,1) Introduction of DSP adjustments 1 Y ou can use this unit to contr ol multi-channel processor (e.g. DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600), which is sold separately . ! Some functions may differ depending on the multi-channel processor connected to this unit. By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in the order shown, you can create a fi- nely-tuned sound field effortlessly. 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) 4 Adjusting the time alignment 5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 6 Selecting a cross-over frequency 7 Adjusting the speaker output levels 8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer 1 DSP display Shows the DSP function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch DSP to display the DSP function names. The DSP function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , you cannot use audio functions. Also, equalizer cur ve setting, POSITION , AUTO EQ and AUTO T A will be can- celled. # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , audio is outputted from front speakers only . # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to D.R.C . # When neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is se- lected in POSITION , you cannot switch to TIME ALIGNMENT . # When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting, you cannot switch to DOLBY PRO LOGIC II . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the DSP function within about 30 seconds, the display is automat ically re- turned to the source display . Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. <CRB2163-B>75 Digital Signal Processor En 75 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (76,1) 1 T ouch POSITION on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c/ d/ a / b to select a listening po- sition. T ouch one of these, c/ d/ a/ b, to select a lis- tening position as listed in the table. Key Display Position c FRONT -L F ront seat left d FRONT -R F ront seat right a FRONT F ront seats b ALL All seats # T o cancel the selected listening position, touch the same key again. Note When you make adjustments to the listening po- sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels. Y ou can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide you an ideal listening envir- onment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch FADER/BALANCE on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/r ear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :25 to REAR:25 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR:00 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the lef t or the right. LEFT :25 to RIGHT :25 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from lef t to right. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 T ouch SLA on the DSP function menu. 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch a or b it increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 to âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. <CRB2163-B>76 Digital Signal Processor En 76 Section 17
Black plate (77,1) ! Video CD, CD and MP3/WMA are set to the same source level adjustment volume auto - matically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! AUX (auxiliar y input) and AV (AV input) are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and softest sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. ! When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to D.R.C. 1 T ouch D.R.C on the DSP function menu. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch this mode. 2 T ouch ON to turn the dynamic range control on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , touch OFF . Using the down-mix function Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. 1 T ouch DOWN MIX on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired level. T ouch c to select Lo/Ro. T ouch d to select Lt/Rt . ! Lo/Ro â Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as sur- round components. ! Lt/Rt â Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). Using the direct control Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. ! All audio functions are locked out when the direct control is on except VOLUME. 1 T ouch DIGIT AL DIRECT on the DSP func- tion menu. 2 T ouch ON to turn the direct control on. # T o turn direct control off , touch OFF. Using the Dolby Pro Logic II Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two -channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no ef- fect on other types of source. 1 T ouch DOLBY PRO LOGIC II on the DSP function menu. <CRB2163-B>77 Digital Signal Processor En 77 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (78,1) 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. ! MOVIE â The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! MUSIC â The Music mode suitable for music playback ! MA TRIX â The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak ! OFF â T urn Dolby P ro Logic II off ! ADJUST â Adjust the Music mode # Y ou can operate ADJUST only when MUSIC has been selected. Adjusting the Music mode Y ou can adjust the Music mode with the fol- lowing three controls. ! P anorama ( P ANORAMA ) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting âÂÂwraparound â ef- fect. ! Dimension ( DIMENSION ) allows you to gradually adjust the sound field either to- wards the front or the rear . ! Center Width Control ( CENTER WIDTH) al- lows center-channel sounds to be posi- tioned between the center speaker and the left/right speakers. It improves the lef t-cen- ter-right stage presentation for both the dri- ver and the front passenger . 1 T ouch DOLBY PRO LOGIC II on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch MUSIC and then touch ADJUST. # Y ou can operate ADJUST only when MUSIC has been selected. 3 T ouch a or b to select P ANORAMA (pa- norama). Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: P ANORAMA (panorama) âÂÂDIMENSION (di- mension) â CENTER WIDTH (center width) 4 T ouch c to turn the panorama control on. # T o turn the panorama control off , touch d. 5 T ouch b to select DIMENSION and then touch c or d to adjust fr ont/surround speaker balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the sound towards the front or the surrounds. 3 to âÂÂ3 is displayed as the front/surround speaker balance moves from front to sur- rounds. 6 T ouch b to select CENTER WIDTH and then touch c or d to adjust the center image. Each time you touch c or d it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 0 to 7 . 3 is the default and it âÂÂs recommended for most recordings. 0 places all center sound in the center speaker . 7 places all center sound equally in the lef t/right speakers. Setting the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LARGE (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Otherwise select SMALL (small). ! When DIGIT AL DIRECT is on, you cannot select SPEAKER SETTING . First turn the DIGIT AL DIRECT off , referring to Using the direct control on the previous page. ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SMALL or OFF . ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF. <CRB2163-B>78 Digital Signal Processor En 78 Section 17
Black plate (79,1) ! Set the front or rear speaker to LARGE if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 T ouch SPEAKER SETTING on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) âÂÂPHASE (subwoo - fer setting) # Y ou can switch to PHASE only when the sub- woofer has been set to ON . 3 T ouch c or d to select the correct size for the selected speaker . Each time you touch c or d selects the size in the following order: Speaker Setting FRONT SMALL âÂÂLARGE CENTER OFF âÂÂSMALL âÂÂLARGE REAR OFF âÂÂSMALL âÂÂLARGE SUB WOOFER ON âÂÂOFF PHASE REVERSE âÂÂNORMAL Correcting the subwoofer â s phase If trying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn â t do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer âÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, try changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . 1 T ouch SPEAKER SETTING on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select SUB WOOFER. Each time you touch c or d selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) âÂÂPHASE (subwoo - fer setting) 3 T ouch c to turn subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch d. 4 T ouch d to select PHASE and then touch c or d to select the phase of sub- woofer output. T ouch d to select NORMAL (normal phase). T ouch c to select REVERSE (reverse phase). Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Pro Logic turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur : ! No audio is outputted if the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE and no center speaker is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE . Adjusting the speaker output levels Y ou can readjust the speaker output levels using a test tone while listening to music. 1 T ouch SPEAKER LEVEL on the DSP func- tion menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects the speak- er in the following order: <CRB2163-B>79 Digital Signal Processor En 79 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (80,1) FRONT -L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT -R (front speaker right) â REAR-R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR-L (rear speaker lef t) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set to OFF at the SPEAKER SETTING menu. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. Note T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at TEST TONE . Both provide the same results. Selecting a cross-over frequency Y ou can select a frequency , under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo - fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SMALL, you can select a frequency , under which sounds are repro- duced through a LARGE speaker or subwoo- fer . 1 T ouch CROSS OVER on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) 3 T ouch c or d to select cross-over fre- quency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 (Hz) Note Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a cross- over frequency of the subwoofer âÂÂs L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SMALL speaker H.P .F . (high- pass filter). The cross-over frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LARGE or OFF . Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone This function allows you to easily get the over- all balance right among the speakers. 1 T ouch TEST TONE on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch ST ART to start the test tone out- put. The test tone is outputted. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter vals of about two seconds. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display . FRONT -L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT -R (front speaker right) â REAR-R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR-L (rear speaker lef t) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 5 to stop the test tone. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set OFF . <CRB2163-B>80 Digital Signal Processor En 80 Section 17
Black plate (81,1) 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. 4 T ouch STOP to stop the test tone out- put. Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their âÂÂab- solute â output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on page 79.) ! T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker out- put levels at SPEAKE R LEVEL . Both provide the same results. Using the time alignment Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The time alignment lets you adjust the dis- tance between each speaker and the listening position. 1 T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the time alignment. ! INITIAL â Initial time alignment (factor y set- ting) ! AUTO T A â Time alignment created by auto T A and EQ. (Refer to A uto T A and EQ (auto- time alignment and auto -equalizing) on page 84.) ! CUSTOM â Adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself ! OFF â T urn the time alignment off ! ADJUST â Adjust the time alignment as de- sired # Y ou cannot select AUTO T A if auto TA and EQ has not been carried out. # Y ou cannot select ADJUST when neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is selected in POSITION . Adjusting the time alignment Y ou can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. ! An adjusted time alignment is memorized in CUSTOM. 1 T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT on the DSP function menu and then touch ADJUST. # Y ou cannot select ADJUST when neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is selected in POSITION . 2 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT -L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT -R (front speaker right) â REAR-R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR-L (rear speaker lef t) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the distance be- tween the selected speaker and the listen- ing position. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the distance. 0.0 â 500.0 [cm] is dis- played as the distance is increased or decreased. 4 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . <CRB2163-B>81 Digital Signal Processor En 81 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (82,1) Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer curves: Display Equ alizer curve Powerful P ower ful Natural Natural V ocal V ocal Flat Flat Custom1 Custom 1 Custom2 Custom 2 Super Bass Super bass ! Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equal- izer cur ves. ! When Flat is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer cur ve. % On the normal display , touch EQ to se- lect the equalizer . T ouch EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: Powerful âÂÂNatural âÂÂV ocal âÂÂFlat âÂÂCustom1 â Custom2â Super Bass # If SFC instead of EQ appears on the normal display , touch SFC and hold to switch to equalizer function. About SFC, refer to Using the sound field control on this page. Using the sound field control The SFC function creates the sensation of a live per formance. ! One of the greatest advantages to hear music in live is the original acoustic sound that is echoed or reflected against the stage surroundings. The SFC circuitr y en- ables to reproduce the live per forming sound in car environment by programming the direct sound, early reflections, and late reflections effects and characterizing the sound from CD, DVD or other medium so it becomes closer to the live acoustic sound. 1 On the normal display , touch EQ and hold to switch to SFC function. T ouch EQ and hold until Sound Field Control appears in the display . # T o switch to equalizer function, touch EQ and hold again. 2 T ouch SFC to select the desired SFC mode. T ouch SFC repeatedly to switch between the following modes: MUSICAL (musical) âÂÂDRAMA (drama) â ACTION (actio n) âÂÂJAZZ (jazz) âÂÂHALL (hall) â CLUB (club) âÂÂOFF (off) Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2- channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channe l audio (i.e., MUSICAL, DRAMA or ACTION), we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic II on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ , HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic II off . <CRB2163-B>82 Digital Signal Processor En 82 Section 17
Black plate (83,1) Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Fo r Custom1 and Custom2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the front, rear and center equalizer cur ves separately by selecting a cen- ter frequency , an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate Custom1 cur ve can be created for each source. ! A Custom2 cur ve can be created common to all sources. ! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn âÂÂt easy . W e recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other spea kers. % T ouch P ARAMETRIC EQ on the DSP function menu. Note Y ou can select a center frequency for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-oc- tave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that have inter vals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. Speaker select 1 T ouch c or d to select SP-SEL. Each time you touch c or d selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) â BAND (bands) â FREQUENCY (center frequency) âÂÂLEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 2 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. T ouch c or d until the desired speaker ap- pears in the display. REAR (rear speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speak- er) â FRONT (front speakers) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . Band 1 T ouch c or d to select BAND. Each time you touch c or d selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) â BAND (bands) â FREQUENCY (center frequency) âÂÂLEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 2 T ouch c or d to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) Frequency 1 T ouch c or d to select FREQUENCY. Each time you touch c or d selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) â BAND (bands) â FREQUENCY (center frequency) âÂÂLEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 2 T ouch c or d to select the center fre- quency of selected band. T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display. 40Hz âÂÂ50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz â 160Hzâ 200Hzâ 250Hzâ 315Hzâ 400Hzâ 500Hz âÂÂ630Hz âÂÂ800Hz âÂÂ1kHz âÂÂ1.25kHz â 1.6kHz âÂÂ2kHz âÂÂ2.5kHz âÂÂ3.15kHz âÂÂ4kHz â 5kHz âÂÂ6.3kHz âÂÂ8kHz âÂÂ10kHz âÂÂ12.5kHz <CRB2163-B>83 Digital Signal Processor En 83 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (84,1) Level 1 T ouch c or d to select LEVEL. Each time you touch c or d selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) â BAND (bands) â FREQUENCY (center frequency) âÂÂLEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 2 T ouch c or d to adjust the equalizer level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the equalizer level. 06 to â 06 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. Q factor 1 T ouch c or d to select Q. FACTOR. Each time you touch c or d selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) â BAND (bands) â FREQUENCY (center frequency) âÂÂLEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired Q factor . Each time you touch c or d switches between the following Q factor: NARROW (narrow) âÂÂWIDE (wide) # Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way . Using the auto-equalizer The auto -equalizer is the equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto T A and EQ (refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto -equalizing) on this page). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . 1 T ouch AUTO EQ on the DSP function menu. # Y ou cannot use this function if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. 2 T ouch ON to turn the auto-equalizer on. # T o turn auto -equalizer off , touch OFF. Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The auto -time alignment is automatically ad- justed for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The auto -equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates the auto -equalizer cur ve based on that information. WARNING T o prevent accidents, never carr y out auto T A and EQ while driving. When this function measure s the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto-equalizer cur ve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. CAUTION ! Carr ying out auto T A and EQ under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly be- fore carr ying out auto TA and EQ. â When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) â When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker âÂÂs maximum input power capabil- ity . ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measure ment tone may become loud and measuremen t may take a long time, resulting in a drain on batter y power . Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. <CRB2163-B>84 Digital Signal Processor En 84 Section 17
Black plate (85,1) Before operating the auto T A and EQ function ! Carr y out auto T A and EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air conditioning switched off . Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. Sounds other than the measurement tone (sur- rounding sounds, engine sound, tele- phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto T A and EQ using the supplied microphone. Using another microphone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! When front speaker is not connected, auto T A and EQ cannot be carried out. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto T A and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power amp âÂÂs input level to the standard position. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn off the LPF on the power amp before carr ying out auto T A and EQ. In addition, the cut-off frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency . ! The time alignment value calculated by auto T A and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. However , the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circum- stances, so please continue to use this value. â When the reflected sound within a vehi- cle is strong and delays occur . â When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. ! Auto T A and EQ changes the audio settings as below: â The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (R efer to page 76.) â The equalizer cur ve switches to Flat. (Refer to page 82.) â It will be adjusted automatically to high pass filter setting for front, center and rear speaker . ! If you carr y out auto T A and EQ when a pre- vious setting of this already exists, the set- ting will be replaced. Carrying out auto T A and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roof, and then turn the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver â s seat, fa- cing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto T A and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carr y out auto T A and EQ. 3 T ur n the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car â s air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. <CRB2163-B>85 Digital Signal Processor En 85 Section 17 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (86,1) # P ress SOURCE to turn the source on if this unit is turned off . 4 Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. Refer to Using the position selector on page 75. # If no position is selected before you start auto T A and EQ, FRONT -L is selected automatically . 5 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 6 T ouch and hold EQ to enter the auto T A and EQ measurement mode. 7 Plug the microphone into the micro- phone input jack on the multi-channel pro - cessor . AUTO T A&EQ microphone F or details concerning operation, refer to the multi-channel processor âÂÂs operation manual. 8 T ouch ST ART to start the auto T A and EQ. 9 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers, and auto T A and EQ be- gins. # When all speaker s are connected, auto T A and EQ is completed in about nine minutes. # T o stop auto T A and EQ, touch STOP. # T o cancel auto T A and EQ part way through, touch BACK or ESC . 10 When auto T A and EQ is completed, Complete is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (Refer to Under- standing auto T A and EQ err or messages on page 105.) 11 T ouch ESC to cancel the auto T A and EQ mode. 12 Store the microp hone carefully in the glove compartment. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or mal- function. <CRB2163-B>86 Digital Signal Processor En 86 Section 17
Black plate (87,1) Introduction of setup adjustments 1 1 Setup menu display Shows the setup function names. 1 T ouch AUDIO MENU to display MENU. MENU appears on the display . # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick on the remote control. 2 T ouch SETUP to display the setup func- tion names. The setup function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the setup function within about 30 seconds, the display is automat ically re- turned to the source display . Setting the A V input Y ou can connect up to two A V components to this unit and display videos either on AV source or EXT source. Switch the A V input setting depending on the connected AV components. ! Select VIDEO to watch video of a con- nected component as AV source. ! Select EXT -V to watch video of a connected video unit as EXT source. ! Select B. CAMERA to watch a rear view camera video while you are backing your vehicle. When A V component is connected to A V input 1 % T ouch A V input on the setup menu to select the A V input 1 setting. T ouch A V input until the desired setting is se- lected. ! OFF â No video component is connected ! VIDEO â External video component (such as portable video player) ! EXT -V â External video unit (such as P io - neer products available in the future) # EXT -V can be selected only when external video unit is connected to this unit. When A V component is connected to A V input 2 1 T ouch AV INPUT 2 on the setup menu. 2 T ouch c or d on the A V INPUT 2 setting to select your desired setting. Each time you touch c or d it switches be- tween the following AV input 2 settings: ! OFF â No video component is connected ! B. CAMERA â Rear view camera ! VIDEO â External video component (such as portable video player) <CRB2163-B>87 Setup En 87 Section 18 Setup
Black plate (88,1) When rear view camera is connected to A V input 2 CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images, other- wise screen image may appear reversed. Y ou can install a rear view camera onto the A V input 2 and display a rear view camera video. When the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) posi- tion, the video automatically switches to a rear view camera video. (F or more details, consult your dealer .) ! After you set up the rear view camera set- ting, move the gear shift in REVERSE (R) and confirm if a rear view camera video can be shown on the display . ! If the display should be switched to a rear view camera video by error while you are driving for ward, change the rear view cam- era setting. ! T o end watching a rear view camera video and return to the source display , press V .ADJ . 1 T ouch AV INPUT 2 on the setup menu. 2 T ouch c or d on the A V INPUT 2 setting to select B. CAMERA. 3 T ouch c or d on the POLARITY setting to select an appropriate setting for polar - ity . Each time you touch c or d it switches be- tween the following polarity: ! BA TTER Y â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is positive while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! GND â When the polarity of the connected lead is negative while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 T ouch CLOCK ADJ on the setup menu. 2 T ouch OFF to turn the clock display on. ON will appear in the display instead of OFF . Clock display is now on. # T o turn the clock display off , touch ON. 3 T ouch c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. Each time you touch c or d it will select one segment of the clock display: Hour âÂÂMinute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will be highlighted. 4 T ouch a or b to set the clock. Each time you touch a it increases the se- lected hour or minute. Each time you touch b it decreases the selected hour or minute. Notes ! Y ou can match the clock to a time signal by touching JUST. â If the minute is 00 to 29, the minutes are rounded down. (e.g., 10:18 becomes 10:00 .) â If the minute is 30 to 59, the minutes are rounded up. (e.g., 10:36 becomes 11:00.) ! Even when the sources are off , the clock dis- play appears on the display . <CRB2163-B>88 Setup En 88 Section 18
Black plate (89,1) Selecting video on rear display Y ou can set the rear display to automatically switch to the A VG - VDP1 image with the front display . Alternatively , you can set it to remain showing the selected video source and not change with the front display . ! Y ou can operate this function only when a P ioneer V ehicle Dynamics P rocessor (A VG - VDP1) is connected to this unit. ! When selecting SOURCE and the selected source is an audio source, nothing is dis- played on the rear display . % T ouch REAR DISP on the setup menu to display video of the selected source on the rear display . T ouch REAR DISP until the desired video set- ting appears in the display . ! SOURCE â Display the video of the selected source on the rear display ! V .D.P . â Display the AVG- VDP1 on the rear display <CRB2163-B>89 Setup En 89 Section 18 Setup
Black plate (90,1) Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 1 Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. 1 While playing a DVD disc, touch g. Playback of the disc is stopped. SETUP will be displayed instead of MENU on the DVD menu. 2 T ouch SETUP. The DVD setup menu is displayed. 3 T ouch LANGUAGE to display the DVD language menu. T ouch VISUAL to display the DVD visual menu. The DVD function names categorized under the selected menu are displayed. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the DVD setup function within about 30 seconds, the display is automati- cally returned to the playback display. Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 T ouch SUB TITLE LANGUAGE on the DVD language menu. Subtitle language menu is displayed and the currently selec ted language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT. # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV. 2 T ouch the desired language. A subtitle language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on this page. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language by touching SUB TITLE during playback. (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during play- back (Multi-subtitle) on page 31.) ! Even if you use SUB TITLE during playback to switch the subtitle language , this does not af- fect the settings here. When you select OTHERS When you select OTHERS, a language code input display is shown. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 112 to input the four- digit code of the desired language. 1 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the language code. # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 2 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch ENTER. <CRB2163-B>90 DVD Setup En 90 Section 19
Black plate (91,1) Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 T ouch AUDIO LANGUAGE on the DVD language menu. Audio language menu is displayed and the currently selec ted language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT. # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV. 2 T ouch the desired language. The audio language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on the previous page. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language by touching AUDIO during playback. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 30.) ! Even if you use AUDIO during playback to switch the audio language , this does not af- fect the settings here. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 T ouch MENU LANGUAGE on the DVD language menu. A menu language menu is displayed and the currently set language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT. # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV. 2 T ouch the desired language. The menu language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on the previous page. Note If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is dis- played. Switching the assist subtitle on or off If assist subtitles are recorded on a DVD disc, you can display them by turning the assist subtitle function on. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD language menu. 2 T ouch ASSIST SUB TITLE to turn assist subtitles on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn the assist subtitle off , touch ASSIST SUB TITLE again. Setting the angle icon display With this function on, the angle icon appears when the scene can be played back by differ- ent angle. % T ouch MUL TI ANGLE on the DVD visual menu to turn the angle icon display on. ON appears in the display . # T o turn the angle icon display off , touch MUL TI ANGLE again. <CRB2163-B>91 DVD Setup En 91 Section 19 DVD Setup
Black plate (92,1) Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to -height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to VIDEO OUTPUT . ! When using a regular display , select either LETTER BOX or P ANSCAN . Selecting 16 : 9 may result in an unnatural picture. ! If you select the TV aspect, the unit âÂÂs dis- play changes to the same setting. 1 T ouch TV ASPECT on the DVD visual menu. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the TV aspect. ! 16 : 9 â Wi de screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX â The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P ANSCAN â The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P ANSCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select P ANSCAN setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (See page 11.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc âÂÂs in- structions. Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult- oriented scenes. Y ou can set the par- ental lock to your desired level. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level Y ou need to have registered a code number for playing back discs with parantal lock. 1 T ouch P ARENT AL on the DVD visual menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input a four digit code number . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 3 While the inputted number is dis- played, touch ENTER. The code number is set, and you can now set the level. 4 T ouch any of 1 âÂÂ8 to select the desired level. The parental lock level is set. ! LEVEL 8 â Playback of the entire disc is pos- sible (initial setting) ! LEVEL 7 to LEVEL 2 â Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! LEVEL 1 â Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Look for the level indication written at the disc package, included literature or on the disc it- self . P arental lock of this unit is not possible if a parental lock level is not recorded in the disc. <CRB2163-B>92 DVD Setup En 92 Section 19
Black plate (93,1) ! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac- tive only on the scenes with certain levels. The playback of those scenes will be skipped. For details, refer to the instruction manual that came with the discs. Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 T ouch P ARENT AL on the DVD visual menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the registered code number . 3 T ouch ENTER. This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. T ouch C and input the cor- rect code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 4 T ouch any of 1 âÂÂ8 to select the desired level. The new parental lock level is set. If you forget your code number Refer to Setting the code number and level on the previous page, and touch C 10 times. The registered code number is all cleared, letting you register a new one. <CRB2163-B>93 DVD Setup En 93 Section 19 DVD Setup
Black plate (94,1) Adjusting initial settings 2 1 Using the initial settings, you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal per- formance from this unit. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch OFF to turn this unit off. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . 2 T ouch AUDIO MENU and then touch INITIAL to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT. # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Switching the auxiliary setting Auxiliar y equipments connected to this unit can be activated individually . Set each AUX source to ON when using. About connecting or using auxiliar y equipments, refer to Using the AUX source on page 101. % T ouch AUX1/AUX2 on the initial menu to tur n each auxiliary setting on. # T o turn auxiliar y setting off , touch AUX1/ AUX2 again. Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit âÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put) can be used for full-range speaker ( FULL) or subwoofer ( SUB. W) connection. If you switch the rear output setting to SUB. W , you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliar y amp. Initially , the unit is set for rear full-range speak- er connection ( FULL). When rear output is connected to full range speakers (when FULL is selected), you can connect the RCA sub- woofer output to a subwoofer . In this case, you can select whether to use the subwoofer con- troller â s (low pass filter , phase) built-in SUB.W or the auxiliar y FULL . ! When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you cannot operate this function. 1 T ouch REAR SP on the initial menu. 2 T ouch c or d on the REAR SPEAKER to switch the rear output setting. T ouch c to select full-range speaker and FULL appears in the display . T ouch d to select sub- woofer and SUB. W appears in the display . # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select FULL. <CRB2163-B>94 Initial Setup En 94 Section 20
Black plate (95,1) # When a subwoo fer is connected to the rear output, set for subwoofer SUB. W . # When the rear output setting is SUB. W , you cannot change the subwoo fer controller . 3 T ouch c or d on the PREOUT setting to switch the subwoofer output or non fading output. T ouch c to select subwoofer output and SUB.W appears in the display . T ouch d to se- lect non fading output and FULL appears in the display. Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there is no output unless you turn the nonfading output (refer to Using nonfading output on page 72) or subwoofer output (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 72) in the audio menu on. ! If you change the subwoofer controller , sub- woofer output and nonfadin g output in the audio menu return to the factor y settings. Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 kHz, the preset step, and 50 kHz. % T ouch FM STEP on the initial menu to select the FM tuning step. T ouching FM STEP will switch the FM tuning step between 50 kHz and 100 kHz. The se- lected FM tuning step will appear in the dis- play . Note If seek tuning is per formed in 50 kHz steps, sta- tions may be tuned in imprecisely . T une in the sta- tions with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 kHz, the preset step, and 10 kHz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 kHz (531 kHz to 1 602 kHz allowable) to 10 kHz (530 kHz to 1 640 kHz allowable). % T ouch AM STEP on the initial menu to select the AM tuning step. T ouching AM STEP will switch the AM tuning step between 9 kHz and 10 kHz. The selected AM tuning step will appear in the display . Changing languages for CAUTION Some operations on this unit are prohibited while driving or needs to be paid a careful at- tention when operating. In such case, a cau- tion appears on the display . Y ou can change the language of the cautions at this setting. % T ouch CAUTION on the initial menu to select your desired language. Each time you touch CAUTION, the language for CAUTION is switched. Switching the sound muting/attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenu- ated autom atically when the signal from the equipment with mute function is received. ! The sound is turned off , MUTE is displayed and no audio adjustments are possible. ! The sound is attenuated, AT T is displayed and no audio adjustments, except volume control, are possible. <CRB2163-B>95 Initial Setup En 95 Section 20 Initial Setup
Black plate (96,1) ! Sound from this system returns to normal when the muting or attenuation is can- celed. % T ouch TEL/GUIDE on the initial menu to select any of the muting, attenuation or off. T ouch TEL/GUIDE until the desired setting ap- pears in the display. ! MUTE â Muting ! A TT -20dB â Attenuation (A TT -20dB has a stronger effect than A TT -10dB ) ! A TT -10dB â Attenuation ! OFF â T urn the sound muting/attenuation off Notes ! The sound is muted or attenuated, MUTE or AT T are displayed and no audio adjustment is possible. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection or the voice guidance is ended. Mixing A VG-VDP1 beep an d audio sound When connecting the AVG-VDP1 to this unit, a beep sound is occasionally outputted from the AVG- VDP1. T o ensure the quality audio sound from this unit, set this function to GUIDE to properly mix the beep sound and the audio sound. ! Y ou can operate this function only when a P ioneer V ehicle Dynamics P rocessor (A VG - VDP1) is connected to this unit. ! When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you cannot use this function. ! W e recommend that you select GUIDE to ensure quality sound. % T ouch VDP MIX on the initial menu to switch the mixing of A VG-VDP1 beep. T ouching VDP MIX switches the mixing set- tings between ALL (mixing all the time) and GUIDE (mixing when a beep sound is out- putted). Correcting distorted sound Y ou can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer curve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW. Normally , leave the set- ting at HIGH to ensure quality sound. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. % T ouch D. A TT on the initial menu to switch the digital attenuator setting. T ouching D. A TT switches the digital attenua- tor settings in the following order: HIGH âÂÂLOW Setting the TV signal When this unit is connected to a TV tuner , you need to adjust the TV signal suitable to your countr y TV signal setting. ! This function is initially set to AUTO so that this unit automatically adjusts the TV signal setting. % T ouch TV SIG on the initial menu to se- lect an appropriate TV signal. T ouching TV SIG switches TV signal settings in the following order: AUTO â PA L âÂÂNTSC âÂÂP AL-M âÂÂSECAM <CRB2163-B>96 Initial Setup En 96 Section 20
Black plate (97,1) Note About your country TV signal, consult with your nearest P ioneer dealer . Resetting the audio functions Y ou can reset all audio functions except vo- lume. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650/DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch RESET on the initial menu. Proceed with re set? appears and asks you to confirm it. 2 T ouch RESET again to reset audio func- tions. Reset completed is displayed and the audio settings are reset. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, touch CANCEL . Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection With some Bluetooth audio players, you may be required to enter to this unit in advance PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player , in order to set this unit ready for a connection from your Bluetooth audio player . ! Only when Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD - BTB100) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch PIN code input on the initial menu. PIN code input display appears. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player . # T ouch C to delete the number . 3 After inputting PIN code (up to 16 di- gits), touch ENTER. The PIN code you entered is stored in this unit. Extending the vehicle â s antenna At the standard setting, the antenna of your vehicle is automatically retracted when you se- lect the source OFF or when the ignition switch is at ACC. At this setting, the source re- mains OFF even when you receive an incom- ing call through Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD- BTB100). If you want to take the incoming calls you receive on the OFF source, turn AUTO ANT MODE off . The OFF source will be switched to T elephone and the antenna of your vehicle will be extended when this unit re- ceives an incoming call. ! Only when Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD - BTB100) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. % T ouch AUTO ANT MODE on the initial menu to turn the auto antenna mode off. The vehicle â s antenna will be extended and the source will be switched to T elephone ever y time you receive an incoming call. # T o turn the auto antenna mode on, touch AUTO ANT MODE again. <CRB2163-B>97 Initial Setup En 97 Section 20 Initial Setup
Black plate (98,1) Adjusting the screen Changing the wide screen mod e Y ou can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. % Press WIDE to select the desired set- ting. P ress WIDE repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FULL (full) âÂÂJUST (just) âÂÂCINEMA (cinema) â ZOOM (zoom) âÂÂNORMAL (normal) # When AVG-VDP1 is connected to this unit, press WIDE and hold to select a desired screen mode. Pressing and holding WIDE repeatedly switches between the settings. FULL (full) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc- tion only, giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal pic- ture) without any omissions. JUST (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally to the ends, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen. CINEMA (cinema) The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as FULL or ZOOM in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between FULL and ZOOM in the vertical direction; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap- tions lie outside. ZOOM (zoom) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizonta lly; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture). NORMAL (normal) A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. Notes ! Different settings can be memorized for each video source. ! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio, it may appear different. ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public view- ing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author âÂÂs rights protected by the Copy- right Law . ! Video will appear grainy when viewed in CINEMA or ZOOM mode. Changing the picture adjustm ent Bright, contrast, color and hue Y ou can adjust BRIGHT (brightness), CONTRAST (contrast), COLOR (color) and HUE (hue) for each source and rear view cam- era. ! The adjustments of BRIGHT and CONTRAST are stored separately for light ambient (daytime) and dark ambient (night- time). ! Y ou cannot adjust HUE for P AL video. ! Y ou cannot adjust COLOR or HUE for the audio source. 1 Press V .ADJ and hold to display PICTURE ADJUST. P ress V .ADJ and hold until PICTURE ADJUST appears in the display . 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. The adjustment function names are displayed and adjustable ones are highlighted. <CRB2163-B>98 Other Functions En 98 Section 21
Black plate (99,1) ! BRIGHT â Adjust the black intensity ! CONTRAST â Adjust the contrast ! COLOR â Adjust the color saturation ! HUE â Adjust the tone of color (red is em- phasized or green is emphasized) ! BACK-CAMERA /SOURCE â Switch the pic- ture adjustment modes # Y ou can adjust the picture adjustment for rear view camera only when B. CAMERA is selected for A V INPUT 2 . (Refer to When rear view camera is connected to A V input 2 on page 88.) # If you are viewing image from the rear view camera, you cannot touch SOURCE to adjust pic- ture adjustment for the selected source. # With some rear view cameras, picture adjust- ment may not be possible. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the selected item. Each time you touch c or d it increases or de- creases the level of selected item. 24 to â 24 is displayed as the level is increa sed or de- creased. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Dimmer The adjustment of DIMMER is stored sepa- rately for each ambient light; daytime, evening and nighttime. 1 Press V .ADJ and hold to display PICTURE ADJUST. P ress V .ADJ and hold until PICTURE ADJUST appears in the display . 2 T ouch DIMMER. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the brightness. Each time you touch c or d moves the key to- wards the left or the right. The level indicates the brightness of the screen being adjusted. The farther the key moves to the right, the brighter the screen. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Note The icons indicating the current ambient bright- ness used for adjusting BRIGHT and CONTRAST may differ from DIMMER slightly . Selecting the background display Y ou can display the thumbnails of available background pictures/movies and select one to set your background display. The selection can be made each for the audio source group (playing CD, listening to T uner , using tele- phone source, etc.) and the movie source group (watching DVD, AV , etc.). 1 Press ENTERT AINMENT (ENT). Thumbnails of background pictures/movies appear on the display . # T o go to the next group of thumbnails, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of thumbnails , touch PREV. 2 T ouch one of the thumbnails that you want to display in the background. The selected picture/movie is displayed at the background. Note In the following cases, background images from that source cannot be selected: ! When each AV input setting (A V input 1 and 2) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 87). ! When the A VG-VDP1 is not connected to this unit. <CRB2163-B>99 Other Functions En 99 Section 21 Other Functions
Black plate (100,1) Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch Panel Calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response po- sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad- justment methods: 4-point adjustment, in which you touch four corners of the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen. ! Make sure to use the supplied pen for ad- justment, and gently touch the screen. If you press the touch panel forcefully , the touch panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen. Otherwise the screen is damaged. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch OFF to turn this unit off. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . 2 Press and hold BAND/ESC. The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap- pears. 3 T ouch each of the arrows on the four corners of the scr een with the touch panel adjustment pen. Arrows you touch turn red. # If the arrows are not turned red, the 4-point ad- justment cannot be complete. T ouch each arrow for adjustment and complete, or cancel the ad- justment to return to the OFF display . # T o cancel the adjustment, press V .ADJ . 4 Press BAND/ESC to complete the 4- point adjustment. The adjusted position data is saved. ! Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data. 5 Press BAND/ESC to proceed to the 16- point adjustment. The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen appears. # T o cancel the adjustment, press V .ADJ . 6 Gently touch the center of the mark displayed on the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. After you touch all the marks, the adjusted po- sition data is saved. ! Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data. 7 T o complete the adjustment, press V .ADJ. # T o restart the 16-point adjustment, press BAND/ESC . Note If touch panel adjustment cannot be per formed properly , consult your local P ioneer dealer . Displaying the A VG-VDP1 (Pioneer V ehicle Dynamics Processor) This unit can be used as the display unit for the AVG-VDP1 (sold separately) product. ! Y ou can operate this function only when a P ioneer V ehicle Dynamics P rocessor (A VG - VDP1) is connected to this unit. % Press V .ADJ to switch the display to the A VG-VDP1. # T o return to the video of sources, press V .ADJ again. <CRB2163-B>100 Other Functions En 100 Section 21
Black plate (101,1) Using the AUX source This unit can control an auxiliar y equipment such as VCR or portable device (sold sepa- rately). When connected, auxiliar y equipment is automatically read in as AUX source and as- signed to AUX . About AUX connection method Y ou have two methods to connect auxiliar y equipment to this unit. Stereo mini pin plug cable When connecting auxiliar y equipment using a stereo mini plug cable % Insert the stereo mini plug into the AUX input jack on this unit. F or more details, refer to the installation man- ual. IP-BUS-RCA interconnector When connecting auxiliar y equipment using an IP -BUS-RCA Inter connector (sold separately) % Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separetely) to connect this unit to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. F or more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Inter- connector owner âÂÂs manual. # Y ou can only make this type of connection if the auxiliary equipment has RCA outputs. Selecting AUX as the source % T ouch the source icon and then touch AUX to select AUX as the source. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen . # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. F or more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 94. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, press A.MENU button and touch FUNCTION and then touch EDIT. 2 T ouch ABC to select the desired charac- ter type. T ouch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character types: Alphabet (upper case), numbers and symbols â alphabet (lower case)â European letters, such as those with accents (e.g., á, à, ä , ç) # Y ou can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123. 3 T ouch a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. Each time you touch a it will display alphabet, numbers or symbols in ascending order ( AB C ... ). Each time you touch b it will display a letter in descending order . 4 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, touch d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . T ouch c to move backwards in the display. <CRB2163-B>101 Other Functions En 101 Section 21 Other Functions
Black plate (102,1) 5 T ouch OK to store the entered title in memory . 6 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . Setting remote control code type Changing the remote control operation switch to DVD mode enables you to operate the built- in DVD player with the supplied remote con- trol. There are three remote codes for DVD mode, code type A, code type B and code type AV H . However , when operating this unit, use the code type AV H only. ! With this unit, code A and B cannot be used. 1 Set the remote control selection switch on the left side of the re mote control to the appropriate position with a pen tip or other pointed instrument . ! If you select AV H mode, there is no need to take the following procedure. ! If you select A/ B and if in case you need to operate other Pioneer units (may be avail- able in the future), take the following proce- dure and change the code type to the appropriate type. 2 Press 0 and CLEAR on the remote con- trol simultaneously to change the code type. Initially , the code type is set to A . Each time you press 0 and CLEAR simultaneously on the remote control the code type switches be- tween A and B. Using the preprogrammed function Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using PGM. ! In order to use PGM button for prepro - grammed func tion, the remote control op- eration mode switch should be set to AV H. % Press PGM to turn pause on when se- lecting the following sources: ! DVD-V â Built-in DVD player ! M-CD â Multi-CD player ! iPod â iP od ! BT Audio â Bluetooth Audio # T o turn pause off , press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to turn BSM on when selecting TUNER as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to turn BSSM on when selecting TV as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. <CRB2163-B>102 Other Functions En 102 Section 21
Black plate (103,1) T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn âÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn âÂÂt operate. Leads and connectors are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once more that all connect ions are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install the correct fuse with the same rating. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocessor to oper- ate incorrectly. P ress RESET . (P age 11) Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty . Clean disc. (P age 107) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play . Check what type the disc is. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correc tly . Connect the cables correctly . The unit is per forming still, slow mo- tion or frame-by-frame playback . There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. There is no picture. The parking brake cord is not con- nected. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The icon is displayed, and op- eration is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compat ible with the disc âÂÂs organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has become impos- sible during playback. After pressing g once, start playback once more. There is no sound. V olume level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off. There is audio and video skip- ping. The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly. The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display . Select the appropriate setting for your display. (P age 92) When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Nothing is displayed. The touch panel keys cannot be used. The rear view camera is not con- nected. A V input 2 is at incorr ect setting. Connect a rear view camera. P ress V .ADJ to return to the source display and then select the correct settin g for AV input 2 . (P age 88) <CRB2163-B>103 Additional Information En 103 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (104,1) Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. ( P age 8, P age 115) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental lock off or change the level. (P age 92) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorr ect. Input the correct code number . (Page 92) Y ou have forgotten your code num- ber . P ress CLEAR 10 times to cancel the code number . (P age 93) Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings . Y ou cannot switch among multiple languages if they are not reco rded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language settings selected in DVD SETUP . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the langua ge selected in DVD SETUP . Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in DVD SETUP is not recorded on the disc. Switching the viewing angle is not possible. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cannot switch between multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes reco rded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angle s when watch- ing scenes recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremely uncle ar/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibitin g copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizontal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs featuring PBC. <CRB2163-B>104 Additional Information En 104 Appendix
Black plate (105,1) Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to record the error message. Message Cause Action (See) ERROR-02 Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly. ERROR-05 Electrical or mechanical P ress RESET . ERROR-A0 Electrical or mechanical Consult your dealer or your nearest author- ized Pioneer Service Station. DIFFERENT REGION DISC The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . NON PLA Y ABLE DISC This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play. TEMPERA TURE PROT ECTION IN MOTION The temperature of this unit is out- side the normal operating range W ait until the unit âÂÂs temperature returns to within normal operating limits. PROTECT All the files on the inserted disc are secured by digital rights manage- ment (DRM) Replace disc. TRACK SKIPPED The inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by digital rights management (DRM) Replace disc. Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto T A and EQ, an error message may appear on the display . If an error message appears, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. Af ter checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action Error check MIC Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. Error check front SP , Error check FL SP , Error check FR SP , Error check center SP , Error check RL SP , Error check RR SP , Error check subwoofer The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly . ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. ! Set the microphone correctly. <CRB2163-B>105 Additional Information En 105 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (106,1) Message Cause Action Error check noise The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible, and switch off the engine, air condi- tioner or heater . ! Set the microphone correctly. <CRB2163-B>106 Additional Information En 106 Appendix
Black plate (107,1) DVD player and care ! Use only normal, round discs. If you insert irregular , non-round, shaped discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play prop- erly . ! Check all discs for cracks, scratches or warping before playing. Discs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed) sur face when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center . ! If the heater is used in cold weather , con- densation may form on components inside the DVD player . Condensation may cause the DVD player to not operate properly . If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to allow it to dr y out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. ! The DVD player plays one, standard 12-cm disc at a time. Playing back an 8-cm disc is not possible with this unit. Playable disc and adapter are listed in the table below . 12-cm disc 8-cm disc 8-cm disc adapter àâÂÂâ DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode). It is not possible to play back DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). ! It may not be possible to play back DVD -R/ DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode), be- cause of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation , etc. on the lens of this unit. ! It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. <CRB2163-B>107 Additional Information En 107 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (108,1) ! It may not be possible to play back CD -R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto- rage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! This unit conforms to the track skip func- tion of the CD -R/CD-RW disc. The tracks containing the track skip information are skipped autom atically (in case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! If you insert a CD -RW disc into this unit, time to playback will be longer than when you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. Dual Discs ! Dual Discs are two -sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other . ! Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. However , since the CD side of Dual Discs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit. ! F requent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc. Serious scratches can lead to playback pro- blems on this unit. In some cases, a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject. T o prevent this, we recommend you refrain from using Dual Disc with this unit. ! Please refer to the information from the disc manufacturer for more detailed infor- mation about Dual Discs. MP3 and WMA files ! MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! WMA is short for Windows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression tech- nology that is developed by Microsoft Cor- poration. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . ! This unit may not operate correctly depend- ing on the application used to encode WMA files. ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! This unit allows playback of MP3/WMA files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Disc recordings compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system can be played back. ! It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. ! MP3/WMA files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3 or .wma), is 64, from the first character . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 64. <CRB2163-B>108 Additional Information En 108 Appendix
Black plate (109,1) ! In case of files recorded according to the Romeo file system, only the first 64 charac- ters can be displayed. ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD -EXTRA and MIXED -MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD-DA. ! The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing software. F or this reason, the expected sequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However , there also is some writing software which per- mits setting of the playback order . ! Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge into one another without a pause. When these discs are converted to MP3/WMA files and burned to a CD-R/CD -RW/CD- ROM, the files will be played back on this player with a short pause between each one, regardless of the length of the pause between tracks on the original audio CD. Important ! When naming an MP3 or a WMA file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3 or .wma). ! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.mp3 or .wma) as an MP3 or a WMA file. T o prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than MP3 or WMA files. MP3 additional information ! Files are compatible with the ID3 T ag V er . 1.0, 1.1, 2.2 and 2.3 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title), artist (track artist) and comments. Ver . 2.x of ID3 T ag is given priority when both V er . 1.x and V er . 2.x exist. ! The emphasis function is valid only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequen- cies are played back. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility . ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO formats. ! The sound quality of MP3 files generally be- comes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality , we recommend using only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps. WMA additional information ! This unit plays back WMA files encoded by Windows Media Player version 7 and 8. ! Y ou can only play back WMA files in the fre- quencies 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. ! The sound quality of WMA files generally becomes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 48 kbps to 192 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality , we recommend using discs recorded with a higher bit rate. ! This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). <CRB2163-B>109 Additional Information En 109 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (1 10,1) About folders and MP3/ WMA files ! An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3/WMA files on it is shown below . Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently se- lected. 3 1 2 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user cannot assign folder numbers. ! It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number .) ! MP3/WMA files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However , there is a delay in the start of playback on discs with numerous tiers. F or this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play back up to 253 items from folders on one disc. Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside this unit, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Do not use the unit in this condition because doing so may result in a fire, electric shock, or other failure. ! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell, or any other abnormal signs from the display , turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Using this unit in this condition may result in permanent da- mage to the system. ! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as there are high-vo ltage compone nts inside which may cause an electric shock. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest author- ized PIONEER Ser vice Station for internal in- spection, adjustments or repairs. Handling the display ! When the display is subjected to direct sun- light for a long period of time, it will be- come ver y hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. When not using this unit, close the display and avoid exposing it to direct sunlight. ! The display should be used within the tem- perature ranges shown below . <CRB2163-B>110 Additional Information En 110 Appendix
Black plate (1 11,1) Storage temperature range: âÂÂ20 ðC to 80 ðC At temperatures higher or lower than the operating temperature range the display may not operate normally. ! The LCD screen of this unit is exposed in order to increase its visibility within the ve- hicle. Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it. ! Do not place anything on the display when it is opened. Also, do not attempt to carr y out angle adjustment, or open/close the display by hand. Applying strong force to the display may damage it. ! Do not push the LCD screen with much force as this may scratch it. ! Be careful not to place anything between the display and the main body when the display is opening or closing. If an object gets between the display and main body , the display may stop working. ! Be careful of fingers, long hair , and loose articles of clothing which could possibly get caught between the display and the main body and cause serious injur y . Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! If the display is near the vent of an air con- ditioner when it is opened, make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from the heater may damage the LCD screen, and cool air from the cool- er may cause moisture to form inside the display resulting in possible damage. Also, if the display is cooled down by the cooler , the screen may become dark, or the life span of the small fluorescent tube used in- side the display may be shortened. ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a problem with the display. ! At low temperatures, the LCD screen may be dark for a while after the power is turned on. ! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight. ! When using a portable phone, keep the an- tenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. Keeping the display in good condition ! When wiping the screen, take care not to scratch the sur face. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. Small fluorescent tube ! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the display to illuminate the LCD screen. â The fluorescent tube should last for ap- proximately 10 000 hours, depending on operating conditions. (Using the display at low temperatures reduces the ser vice life of the fluorescent tube.) â When the fluorescent tube reaches the end of its useful life, the screen will be dark and the image will no longer be projected. If this happens, consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station. <CRB2163-B>111 Additional Information En 111 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (1 12,1) Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 P ashto, P usht o (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortugues e (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te) , 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 T onga (to), 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongoli an (mn ), 1314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 V olapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no), 1415 W olof (wo) , 2315 F aroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy ), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612 <CRB2163-B>112 Additional Information En 112 Appendix
Black plate (1 13,1) T erms Aspect ratio This is the width-to -height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps (bits per second) units. The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con- nectivity technology that is developed as a cable replacement for mobile phones, hand- held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper- ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per second. Bluetooth was launched by a special interest group (SIG) that comprises of Ericsson Inc., Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., T oshiba and IBM in 1998, and it is currently developed by nearly 2 000 companies worldwide. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist âÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the num- ber of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for- mat logic of CD -ROM folders and files. F or the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the â _â sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters). <CRB2163-B>113 Additional Information En 113 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (1 14,1) Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark âÂÂ. â and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally , DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality . m3u Playlists created using the â WINAMP â sof t- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Orga nization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving P ictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session . Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions on one disc. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Optical digital output/input By transmitting and receiving audio signals in a digital signal format, the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of transmis- sion is minimized. An optical digital output/ input is designed to transmit and receive digi- tal signals optically . Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD -R , etc., at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult-or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit âÂÂs parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. <CRB2163-B>114 Additional Information En 114 Appendix
Black plate (1 15,1) Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . This unit âÂÂs region number is displayed on the bottom of the unit. Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres- sion, it is possible to achieve compression- priority sound quality. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression technol- ogy that is developed by Microsoft Corpora- tion. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. <CRB2163-B>115 Additional Information En 115 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (1 16,1) Specifications General Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC (allowable voltage range: 12.0 V to 14.4 V DC) Grounding system ................... Negative type Max. current consumption ..................................................... 10.0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ............................... 1 7 8 à10 0 à1 6 6 m m Nose ..................................... 1 7 1 à96 à1 6 mm W eight .......................................... 3 . 0 k g Display Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 7 . 0 inch wide/16:9 (effective display area: 156 à82 mm) P ixels ............................................. 336,960 (1,440 à234) T y p e ................................................ T F T acti ve matrix, transmis- sive type Color system .............................. NTSC/PAL/P AL-M/SECAM compatible Storage temperature range ..................................................... â 20 ðC to 80 ðC Angle adjustment .................... 0 ð t o 2 1 ð (initial settings: 0ð) Audio Continuous power output is 22 W per channel minimum into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15 000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à4 50 W à2/4 W 70 W à1/2 W (for subwoofer) Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W allowable) P reout max output level/output impedance ..................................................... 4 . 0 V/100 W Equalizer (3-Band P aram etric Equalizer): Low F requency ................ 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ 1 2 d B Mid F requency ................ 200/500/1k/2k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ 1 2 d B High F requency ................ 3.15k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ 1 2 d B Loudness contour: L o w ....................................... 3.5 dB (100 Hz), 3 dB (10 kHz) M i d ....................................... 1 0 d B (100 Hz), 6.5 dB (10 kHz) High ..................................... 1 1 dB (100 Hz), 11 dB (10 kHz) (volume: âÂÂ30 dB) HPF : F requency .......................... 50/80/125 Hz Slope .................................... âÂÂ12 dB/oct Subwoofer: F requency .......................... 50/80/125 Hz Slope .................................... âÂÂ18 dB/oct Gain ...................................... ñ 1 2 d B Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse DVD Player System .......................................... D V D video, Video CD, Com- pact disc audio system Usable discs .............................. D V D video, Video CD, Com- pact disc Region number: for Southeast Asian models ........................................... 3 for South American and Oceani an models ........................................... 4 for Middle East Asian and South African models ........................................... 2 Signal format: Sampling frequency ..... 44.1/48/96 kHz Number of quantization bits ........................................... 16/20/24; linear F requency respo nse ............... 5 H z t o 4 4 0 0 0 H z (with DVD, at sampling frequency 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 9 7 d B (1 kHz) (IEC -A net- work) (CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC -A network)) Dynamic range ......................... 9 5 d B (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB (1 kHz)) Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz ) Output level: Video .................................... 1 . 0 Vp-p/75 W (ñ0.2 V) Number of channels .............. 2 (s t ereo) MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 <CRB2163-B>116 Additional Information En 116 Appendix
Black plate (1 17,1) WMA decoding format ......... Ve r . 7 & 8 FM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 d B f (0.7 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ..... 1 0 d B f (0.9 õV/75 W , mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 7 5 d B (IEC -A network) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 3 % ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf , 1 kHz, mono) F requency respo nse ............... 3 0 H z to 15 0 0 0 Hz (ñ 3 d B ) Stereo separation .................... 4 5 d B ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz) AM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 5 3 1 kH z t o 1 6 0 2 kH z ( 9 kHz) 530 kHz to 1 640 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity ..................... 1 8 õV (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 5 d B (IEC -A network) Infrared remote control W avelength ................................. 9 4 5 n m Output ........................................... typ; 10 mw/sr per Infrared LED Note Specifications and the design are subject to pos- sible modifications without notice due to im- provements. <CRB2163-B>117 Additional Information En 117 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (1 18,1) A Angle icon ................................................. .31, .91 Aspect ratio ............................................ .92, .113 Audio language ........................................ .30, .91 B Bookmark ........................................................ .29 Brightness ....................................................... .98 C Chapter .......................................................... .113 Code number .................................................. . 92 Color ................................................................ .98 Contrast ........................................................... .98 D Direct search .................................................. .30 Dolby Digital .......................... ....................... .113 DTS ................................................................ .113 H Hue .................................................................. .98 L Language code chart .................................. .112 Linear PCM (LPCM) ..................................... .114 M Menu language .............................................. .91 MPEG .......................................................... ... .114 Multi-angle ............................. ................. .31, .114 Multi-audio .............................................. .30, .114 Multi-subtitle .......................... ................. .31, .114 O Optical digital output/input ........................ .114 P P arental lock ........................................... .92, .114 PBC (playback control) ................................. .34 Playback control (PBC) ............................... .115 R Region number ........................................ . 8, .115 S Subtitle language ..................................... .31, .90 T Title ............................................................. ... .115 TV aspect ......................................................... .92 V Video CD ........................................................... .8 W Wide screen mode ......................................... .98 <CRB2163-B>118 Index En 118
Black plate (1 19,1) <CRB2163-B>119 En 119
Black plate (120,1) PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU , TOKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-91 20 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-755 5 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkwa y , Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-2 83-5901 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico , D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-427 0 å  é è¡ 份 æ éÂÂå ¬ å¸ 總 å ¬ å¸ : å°å 帠丠山å 路 亠段 44 èÂÂ13 樠é» 話 : (02) 2521-3588 å  é é» å ＠馠港＠æÂÂéÂÂå ¬ å¸ 馠港 ä¹ é¾ å° æ² å 海港 å 丠ç å æ¥Â丠忠9 æ¨Â901-6 室 é» 話 : (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Corporat ion. Copyright é 2006 by Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. Printed in Japan <CRB2163-B> RC,RD ,RI <KNNZF> <06D00000> <CRB2163-B>120